Horizon

CATEGORY 323 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
CATEGORY 423 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION
CATEGORY 523 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
CATEGORY 623 PARTS INFORMATION
INDEX
GSM-209-020 Manual Revision

GMR-01 20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
Motorola manual affected
This Manual Revision is applicable only to the manual number and version listed below:
68P02902W61-O Service Manual Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2
Service requests
This revision provides a fix to the following service requests: N/A
Reason for revision

This revision provides additional and updated information as follows: Frontmatter page 10. Change of fibre optic bend radius from 30 mm to 60 mm.
Action
Remove and replace pages in the Manual as follows: Remove All pages between the clear acetate front sheet and the blank backing sheet, remove from binder. Insert All pages of the GMR between the front sheet and the blank backing sheet, insert into binder.
Destroy all obsolete pages. Do not destroy this page. Insert this Manual Revision sheet in the front of the manual for future reference.
Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2
20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
GMR Page 1
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
GMR Page 2
Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61-O
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Including: 68P02902W62-O 68P02902W63-O 68P02902W64-O 68P02902W65-O
Service Manual GSM-209-020

GMR-01
68P02902W61-O
Service Manual GSM-209-020

GMR-01

Including: 68P02902W62-O 68P02902W63-O 68P02902W64-O 68P02902W65-O
68P02902W61-O
Positin mark for TED spine
GMR-01
Service Manual
GSM-209-020
Service Manual Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2
E Motorola 1999 2002 All Rights Reserved Printed in the U.K.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Copyrights, notices and trademarks

Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola.
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights of others.
Trademarks
and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. Aspira, Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc. All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.
ii
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Contents
Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First aid in case of electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola GSM manual set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GMR amendment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GMR amendment record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 15 16
Category 323 Technical Description (Tech.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Introduction and specification of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual frequency support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmicro2 external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizoncompact2 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approval and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency band characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
i i
11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 14 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 19
Chapter 2 Equipment enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS modules location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS components location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
i
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. 21 21 22 23
68P02902W61-O
iii
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
24 24 24 25
Chapter 3 Power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply signals and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery pack diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of booster power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC supply socket connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power pin designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC BPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
i
31 31 31 31 32 32 33 34 35 37 38 39 39 39 39 310 310 310 311 311
Chapter 4 Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDIS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main control unit, micro (MCU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68LC060 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICC32 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU-m block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic board ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic site ID and calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. 41 41 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 44 44 44 45 45 45
iv
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of ORAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORAC functional blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY/SCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORAC functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing section of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface framers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signalling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagram of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology for Tx and Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL link options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
46 46 46 47 47 48 48 48 49 410 411 412 412 413 413 414 414 414 414 415 415 415 416 416 416
Chapter 5 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 51 Location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 52 Dual transceiver (DTRX) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DTRX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synthesizer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non volatile storage of calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmicro2 duplexer and combiner/isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer and combiner/ isolator diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rx/Tx interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizoncompact2 isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolator module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rx/Tx interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
53 53 53 55 58 511 511 512 512 512 513 513 514 514 514 515 515
68P02902W61-O
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
516 516 517 518
Chapter 6 Heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat management of the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of BTS heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of finned heatsinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow within the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure cooling overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of booster enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
i
61 61 62 63 63 63 64 64 64 65 65
Chapter 7 Expansion feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Expansion feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion feature overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field replaceable units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single band BTS configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band BTS configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
i
71 71 72 72 72 73 73 74 74
Category 423 Installation & Configuration (Inst.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation procedure overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight of delivered package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space requirements diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i i
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 11 11 11 12 12 13 14 14 14 14 14 15 16 16 16 16 17
vi
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Site visit safety and weather protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions and maintenance cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
18 18 18 18 19
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 E1 link transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 111 Introduction to earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 111 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 111 Installation kit delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 113 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 113 Installation kit equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 113 Unpacking the BTS installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 115 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 115 Disposing of the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 115 Booster installation kit delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 116 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 116 Installation kit equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 116 Unpacking the installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 119 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 119 Disposing of the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 119 Mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 120 Introduction to mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 120 Mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 120 Example layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 122 Mounting the BTS wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling holes for the mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the booster wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling holes for the mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cabling thermal properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
137 137 137 138 138 139 141 144 144 144 145 145 146 148 151 151 151 151 152
68P02902W61-O
vii
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Installing BTS enclosure power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing BTS power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the power and E1/HDSL cable conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the site main earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing booster power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to booster power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth connection point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the supplementary earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
153 153 153 153 154 155 155 156 158 159 160 160 160 160 161 162 162 163 165 166
External antenna cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 External antenna cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 RF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/HDSL link connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology for Tx and Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing E1/HDSL link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing E1/HDSL link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routeing the E1/HDSL link to the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 cabling distance/loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 168 168 168 169 170 170 170 170 170 171
Chapter 2 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 link testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
i
21 21 21 21 22 23
BTS equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 24 Chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 24 Unpacking the chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
25 25 25 25
viii
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Booster equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 26 Chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 26 Unpacking the booster equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the BTS chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installation of the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis installation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting external cables to the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting earth straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Horizonmicro2 antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional internal antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 210 211 212 212 212 213 214 216 217 218 219 222 222 222 223
Battery/cover installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 224 Installing the battery and cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 224 Installing the booster chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing booster chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting external cables to the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to connecting booster external cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting earth straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary earth connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Rx, Tx and antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the alarms cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the security bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
225 225 225 226 227 228 229 229 229 230 231 232 235 236 237 237 240 240 240 241
68P02902W61-O
ix
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Chapter 3 BTS expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master/slave establishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of a BTS site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the BTSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the expansion fibre optic cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the front solar covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the side and inner covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the fibre optic links to the master BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the fibre optic links to the slave BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the BTS solar covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
i
31 31 31 31 32 32 35 35 35 36 37 38 38 39 310 311
Chapter 4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 41 Commissioning overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 41 Pre power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the system visually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering up the BTS and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for powering up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 42 42 42 43 44 44 45 47 48
Battery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 49 Introduction to the battery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 49 Battery test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 49
Chapter 5 Decommissioning the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Decommissioning the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52 52 52 53 56
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Decommissioning a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57 57 57 57 510
Category 523 Maintenance Information (Maint.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended conditions and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to equipment access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access to a wall mounted BTS and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS and booster tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint.
i i
11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 14
Chapter 2 Routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Routine maintenance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of BTS enclosure and solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annual routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
i
Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 23 23 24 24 24 25 26 27 27 27 27
68P02902W61-O
xi
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Chapter 3 Fault diagnosis and repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference to fault diagnosis information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing a BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cable positions diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover attachment diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery attachment diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing customer interface clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS connectors location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer interface clamp diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster disconnection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster cable locations diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster cable locations diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cable removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cable replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. 31 31 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 34 35 35 37 39 39 310 310 311 312 312 313 314 314 315 315 316 317 317 317 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 325 326 326 326 326 327 327 328
xii
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Replacing Horizoncompact2 antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint.
329 329 329 329 330 330
Replacing the alarm cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 331 Removing the alarm cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 331 Replacing the alarm cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 331 Replacing the expansion fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to fibre optic replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic cable removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic cable replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion cover and casting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating an MCU-m GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY cables and pin connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for MCU-m GCLK calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of breakout board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breakout board connection point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. 332 332 332 333 334 335 337 338 338 338 339 342 342 344 345 345
Category 623 Parts Information (Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Options and spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory fitted BTS options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field fitted equipment options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS and booster spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS order and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster order and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Parts Parts Parts Parts Parts Parts Parts Parts Parts Parts
i i
11 11 11 12 13 14 15 15 16 17 19
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I1

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
xiii
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
xiv
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Issue status of this manual
Issue status of this manual

Introduction
The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.
Version information
The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue: Manual issue O Date of issue 14th Dec 01 Original issue. Remarks
Resolution of Service Requests

The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual: Service Request N/A GMR Number N/A Remarks

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
GMR-01
General information
GSM-209-020
General information
Important notice
If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will not be updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola cellular communications manuals are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Motorola cellular infrastructure equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola. WARNING Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.
These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
General information
About this manual

This manual provides a complete hardware description of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 base transceiver stations (BTS), that implement the GSM standards GSM900 and DCS1800. It is divided into categories as follows:
S
Category 323 - Technical Description. This category provides an introduction to, the specification for and a technical description of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.
Category 423 - Installation and Configuration. This category provides the information to install and commission the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.
Category 523 - Maintenance Information. This category provides the information to maintain and repair the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.
Category 623 - Parts Information. This category provides the range of options and spares for the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.
The objectives of this manual are:

S S
To provide an understanding of the purpose and operation of all components. To enable successful installation, commissioning and repair of the product.
The maintenance and repair procedures presume that operators at the Operations and Maintenance Centre Radio (OMC-R) have been able to diagnose a problem, and have provided an engineer or technician despatched to the site with sufficient information to resolve the problem on arrival.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
GMR-01
General information
GSM-209-020
Cross references
Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and section names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text. This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructure manuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special key sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows: CTRLc ALTf | CR or RETURN Press the Control and c keys at the same time. Press the Alt and f keys at the same time. Press the pipe symbol key. Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key is identified with the symbol on both the PC and the Sun keyboards. The keyboard Return key may also be identified with the word Return.
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
First aid in case of electric shock
First aid in case of electric shock

Warning
WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is broken. Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.
Artificial respiration
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration. Send for medical assistance immediately.
Burns treatment
If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial respiration, carry out the following: 1. 2. 3. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required, cover the wound with a dry dressing. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
GMR-01
Reporting safety issues
GSM-209-020
Reporting safety issues

Introduction
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances. Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.
Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises: 1. 2. 3. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment. Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre, Swindon +44 (0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 68437733 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 or China +86 10 68423633 (fax). Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network Resolution Centre.
4.
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Warnings and cautions
Warnings and cautions

Introduction
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all manuals of this Motorola manual set.
Warnings
Definition of Warning
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.
Example and format

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Cautions
Definition of Warning
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.
Example and format

CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing Motorola base stations.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
GMR-01
General warnings
GSM-209-020
General warnings
Introduction
Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
Warning labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific warnings
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment and within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.
High voltage
Certain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply which is potentially lethal. Therefore, the areas where the ac supply power is present must not be approached until the warnings and cautions in the text and on the equipment have been complied with. To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolator must be set to off and locked. Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country legislation which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment is used.
RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station equipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminated cavities or feeders. Refer to the following standards:
S
ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
General warnings
Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Lifting equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.
Do not ...
... substitute parts or modify equipment. Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.
Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.
Toxic material
Certain equipment may incorporate components containing the highly toxic material Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially hazardous if:
S S S
Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin, mouth, or a wound. The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled. Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.
Beryllium warning labels are fitted to equipment incorporating Beryllium or Beryllium Oxide. Observe all safety instructions given on warning labels. Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator. Captive within the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if the component should be broken open or burnt, the Beryllium Oxide, in the form of dust or fumes, could be released, with the potential for harm.
Lithium batteries
Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst and ignite. Defective lithium batteries must not be removed or replaced. Any boards containing defective lithium batteries must be returned to Motorola for repair.
20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
GMR-01
General cautions
GSM-209-020
General cautions
Introduction
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.
Fibre optics
The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 60 mm.
Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to static discharge. Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to static discharge caused by mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital boards. See Devices sensitive to static for further information.
10
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Devices sensitive to static
Devices sensitive to static

Introduction
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage. These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons. MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.
Special handling techniques

In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced, observe the following precautions when handling the replacement:
S S
Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point (ESP) on the equipment. Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted. Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton overall is preferable. If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation. All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an earthed surface. Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive devices. These components may be providing protection to the device.
S S S S
When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never left exposed on the workbench.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
11
GMR-01
Motorola GSM manual set
GSM-209-020

Introduction
The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain the Motorola equipment.
Generic GSM manuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are release dependent:
Classification number GSM-100-101 GSM-100-201 GSM-100-202 GSM-100-313 GSM-100-320 GSM-100-321 GSM-100-403 GSM-100-423 GSM-100-413 GSM-100-501 GSM-100-520 GSM-100-521 GSM-100-523 GSM-100-503 GSM-100-721 GSM-100-712 Name System Information: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: GSM System Operation . . . Operating Information: OMC-R System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema . Technical Description: BSS Implementation . . . . . . . Technical Description: BSS Command Reference . Installation & Configuration: GSM System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization . . . . Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install . . Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: BSS Timers . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions Maintenance Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-R System . . . . . . . . Order number 68P02901W01 68P02901W14 68P02901W19 68P02901W34 68P02901W36 68P02901W23 68P02901W17 68P02901W43 68P02901W47 68P02901W26 68P02901W58 68P02901W57 68P02901W51 68P02901W56 68P02901W72 68P02901W74
12
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Related GSM manuals

The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:
Classification number GSM-001-103 GSM-002-103 GSM-002-703 GSM-005-103 GSM-008-103 GSM-008-703 GSM-TOOLS-001 GSM-TOOLS-002 GSM-TOOLS-701 GSM-TOOLS-702 GSM-006-202 GSM-006-413 GSM-006-712 Name System Information: BSS Equipment Planning . . . . System Information: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information: GSM Advance Operational Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information: Network Health Analyst . . . . . . Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst . System Information: Cell Optimization (COP) . . . . . System Information: Motorola Analysis and Reporting System (MARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: Cell Optimization (COP) . Software Release Notes: Motorola Analysis and Reporting System (MARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: OMC-R System Administration (OSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System . . . . Order number 68P02900W21 68P02900W22 68P02900W76 68P02900W25 68P02900W36 68P02900W77 68P02900W90 68P02900W94 68P02900W69 68P02900W68 68P02901W10 68P02901W39 68P02901W70
Generic GPRS manuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manuals are release dependent:
Classification number GPRS-300-101 GPRS-300-202 GPRS-300-222 GPRS-300-313 GPRS-300-321 GPRS-300-423 GPRS-300-413 GPRS-300-501 GPRS-300-503 GPRS-300-722 GPRS-300-712 Name System Information: GPRS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: OMC-G System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: GSN System Administration Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema . Technical Description: GSN Command Reference . Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install . . . . Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install . Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: GSN System . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-G System . . . . . . . . Order number 68P02903W01 68P02903W03 68P02903W37 68P02903W46 68P02903W18 68P02903W47 68P02903W04 68P02903W19 68P02903W20 68P02903W76 68P02903W70
Related GPRS manuals

The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals: Classification number GPRS-001-103 GPRS-005-103 Name Order number
System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning . . 68P02903W02 System Information: GSN Advance Operational Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W38

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
13
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
BSS service manuals

The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manuals are not release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service manual sets may vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals, but they can all be ordered using the overall catalogue number shown below:
Classification number GSM-100-020 GSM-100-030 GSM-105-020 GSM-106-020 GSM-201-020 GSM-202-020 GSM-203-020 GSM-206-020 GSM-205-020 GSM-204-020 GSM-207-020 GSM-209-020 GSM-208-020 Name Service Manual: BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmicro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizoncompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonoffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 . Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor Order number 68P02901W37 68P02901W38 68P02901W75 68P02901W85 68P02901W95 68P02901W65 68P02902W36 68P02902W15 68P02902W06 68P02902W12 68P02902W46 68P02902W61 68P02902W66
GPRS service manuals

The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals include the Packet Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSS for GPRS:
GPRS-301-020 GPRS-302-020 Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) . . . . . 68P02903W05 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) . . . . . . . 68P02903W10
Classification number
The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For example, manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx contain operating information.
Order number
The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.
Ordering manuals
All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office or Representative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number. Motorola manual sets may also be ordered on CD-ROM.
14
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
GMR amendment
GMR amendment
Introduction to GMRs
Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the manual using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct Motorola manuals as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as the target manual. Each GMR is identified by a number in a sequence that starts at 01 for each manual at each issue. GMRs are issued in the form of loose leaf pages, with a pink instruction sheet on the front.
GMR procedure
When a GMR is received, remove and replace pages in this manual, as detailed on the GMR pink instruction sheet.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
15
GMR-01
GMR amendment record
GSM-209-020
GMR amendment record

GMR instructions
When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below is completed to record the GMR. Retain the pink instruction sheet that accompanies each GMR and insert it in a suitable place in this manual for future reference.
Amendment record
Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table: GMR number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Incorporated by (signature) Greg Tomes
Date 20th Sep 02
16
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
CHAPTER 3 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
CHAPTER 4 DIGITAL MODULES
CHAPTER 5 RF MODULES
CHAPTER 6 HEAT MANAGEMENT
CHAPTER 7 EXPANSION FEATURE
Category 323
Technical Description (Tech.)
Technical Description: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323
ii
Technical Description: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W62-O
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Category 323 Technical Description (Tech.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Introduction and specification of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i i
11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 14 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 19

BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS modules location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS components location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
i
21 21 22 23 24 24 24 25

BTS power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply signals and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
i
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. 31 31 31 31 32 32 33 34 35 37 38
68P02902W62-O
iii
GSM-209-323
Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery pack diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of booster power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC supply socket connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power pin designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC BPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
39 39 39 39 310 310 310 311 311

Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDIS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main control unit, micro (MCU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68LC060 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICC32 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU-m block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic board ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic site ID and calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of ORAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORAC functional blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY/SCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORAC functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing section of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface framers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signalling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagram of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. 41 41 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 46 47 47 48 48 48 49 410 411 412 412 413 413 414 414 414 414
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology for Tx and Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL link options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
415 415 415 416 416 416
Overview of RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 51 Location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 52 Dual transceiver (DTRX) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DTRX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synthesizer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non volatile storage of calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmicro2 duplexer and combiner/isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer and combiner/ isolator diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rx/Tx interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizoncompact2 isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolator module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rx/Tx interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. 53 53 53 55 58 511 511 512 512 512 513 513 514 514 514 515 515 516 516 517 518
Heat management of the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Overview of BTS heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Module heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 62 Enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 63 Overview of enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 63 Diagram of finned heatsinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 63 Airflow within the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 64 Enclosure cooling overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 64 Airflow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 64 Booster heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 65 Overview of booster enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 65
20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323

i
71 71 72 72 72 73 73 74 74
vi
20th Sep 02
Chapter 1
Introduction and specification of equipment

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Chapter 1 Introduction and specification of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 14 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 19

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
iii
GSM-209-323
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs

Overview
The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 are two-carrier base transceiver stations (BTSs) that operate in the GSM900 or DCS1800 frequency bands. They can be deployed indoor or out of doors, operated over a wide temperature range, and can be wall or pole mounted. Both systems are covered in this service manual because of the similarities between them:
S S
They have the same external appearance and are based on similar hardware. They have an Expansion feature that allows two or three Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS units to be connected together to effectively form a two, four or six carrier site.
When the expansion feature is used (see Chapter 7), the two or three Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS units in the expanded system are interconnected by fibre optic cables. One BTS in the configuration acts as the master and the other units as slaves. The master BTS in an expanded system is connected to the network by an E1 or HDSL link.
Horizonmicro2 power
The Horizonmicro2 GSM900 generates 1.2 W (+30.8 dBm) per carrier, while the DCS1800 generates 1.0 W (30.0 dBm) per carrier. NOTE Motorola does not recommend using the Horizonmicro2 in an omni 6 site configuration unless the cell radius is small (in-building coverage required, for example). This is due to the very low Tx output power generated if six carriers are combined. Motorola recommends one antenna per site for Horizonmicro2 and two antennas per site for Horizoncompact2.
Horizoncompact2 power
The Horizoncompact2 incorporates a booster that enables it to provide macro coverage. The BTS contains two transmitter amplifiers, which provide the following power outputs:
S S
The GSM900 version boosts the BTS output of 1.2 W (+30.8 dBm) per carrier to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier. The DCS1800 version, boosts the BTS output of 2.0 W (33.0 dBm) per carrier to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier.
The booster is connected to a single BTS and antenna. An omni macro site comprising three BTSs requires three boosters.
20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 11
GSM-209-323
Software requirements
Software release GSR4 limits the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 to function only as single BTS systems without expansion capabilities. Software release GSR5 or later is required to support the expansion feature for the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. The GSR5 software is needed in both master and slave BTSs to enable the master/slave relationship. If GSR4 software is used on an expanded system, only the BTS with the E1/HDSL connection will be functional.
Battery backup
Battery backup allows a minimum of five minutes full operation for the BTS only; the booster has no battery backup. During battery backup operation the booster operates in bypass mode.
Dual frequency support

There are two variants of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs. One variant operates in the GSM900 frequency band and the other variant operates in the DCS1800 frequency band. The operating frequency is hardware specific and cannot be changed by software. Although a single BTS can only operate at the frequency it is designed for, an expanded system can have a mix of the two variants and can thus support both GSM900 and DCS1800 frequencies.
Frequency hopping
The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 support synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH).
Links
Options exist for sites to be interconnected by E1 or HDSL (star and daisy chain) links. NOTE Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.
Tech. 12
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Horizonmicro2 external view

Figure 1-1 shows a Horizonmicro2 BTS with expansion unit cover fitted.
ig.055.rh
Figure 1-1 Horizonmicro2 BTS with expansion unit cover

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 13
GSM-209-323
Horizoncompact2 system
Figure 1-2 shows a Horizoncompact2 BTS and booster unit.
RF CABLE TO ANTENNA 1 RF CABLE TO ANTENNA 2
Horizoncompact2 Booster
RF CABLING RS232 ALARM LINK
Horizoncompact2 BTS
ig .0 6 0 .rh
Figure 1-2 Horizoncompact2 BTS and booster unit
Tech. 14
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Specifications
Specifications
The following information provides the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS and booster specifications.
Approval and safety

Table 1-1 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 approval and safety information.
Table 1-1 Approval and safety information
Type approval ETS 300 6091
EMC ETS 300 3422
Safety EN 41003 EN 60950
Environmental limits
Table 1-2 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 environmental limits. Table 1-2 Environmental limits Environment Operating Storage (packaged) Temperature 33 _C to +50 _C 33 _C to +70 _C Relative humidity 5% to 100% 8% to 100%
Dimensions
Table 1-3 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment dimensions. Table 1-3 BTS dimensions (mm) Equipment BTS Booster Height 532 347 Width 542 541 Depth, including wall bracket 201 226
Weight
Table 1-4 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment weights. Table 1-4 BTS weights (kg) Equipment BTS Booster GSM900 Booster DCS1800 Weight, excluding wall bracket, solar cover or battery 21 15 19 Weight, including wall bracket, solar cover and battery 28 20 24

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 15
Specifications
GSM-209-323
Power requirements
Table 1-5 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment power requirements. Table 1-5 BTS power requirements Equipment BTS Booster Supply voltage range 88 V to 264 V ac (45 66 Hz) (4566 Maximum supply current range 7.8 A to 2.6 A (depending on supply voltage) 2.3 A
Battery backup
Table 1-6 shows the specifications for the battery used in the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs. Table 1-6 Battery specifications Voltage 22 V dc Capacity 2.5 Ah Backup duration > 5 minutes
Power consumption
Table 1-7 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment power consumption figures. Table 1-7 BTS power consumption (W) Equipment BTS (heater on) BTS (heater off) Booster GSM900 Booster DCS1800 Ambient temperature 40 C to 10 C 10 C to 50 C Maximum power consumption 688 188 169 199 Typical power consumption 658 138 144 170
NOTE
The maximum power consumption figures apply to extreme operating conditions (such as minimum operating ambient temperature, heaters on, maximum RF output power, charging batteries and lowest module efficiencies). Typical power consumption is for the equipment running at full RF output power, trickle battery charge and nominal module efficiencies.
Tech. 16
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Specifications
RF output power
Horizonmicro2 BTS
Table 1-8 displays the Horizonmicro2 transmitter output power. Table 1-8 BTS transmitter output at BTS booster connector Equipment BTS GSM900 BTS DCS1800 Nominal 1.2 W 1.0 W Max 2.13 W 1.78 W Min 0.68 W 0.56 W dBm (nominal) 30.8 dBm +/2.0 dB 30.0 dBm +/2.0 dB
NOTE
The values of +/2.0 dB represent nominal conditions. Under extreme conditions these values can reach +/2.5 dB for both GSM900 and DCS1800 variants.
Horizoncompact2 BTS
Table 1-9 displays the Horizoncompact2 transmitter output power. Table 1-9 BTS transmitter output at BTS booster connector Equipment BTS GSM900 BTS DCS1800 Nominal 1.32 W 2.19 W Max 1.86 W 3.09 W Min 0.93 W 1.55 W dBm (nominal) 31.2 dBm +/1.5 dB 33.4 dBm +/1.5 dB
Table 1-10 displays the Horizoncompact2 booster input power. Table 1-10 BTS transmitter output at the booster input Equipment BTS GSM900 BTS DCS1800 Nominal 1.2 W 2.0 W Max 1.7 W 2.82 W Min 0.85 W 1.41 W dBm (nominal) 30.8 dBm +/1.5 dB 33.0 dBm +/1.5 dB
NOTE
The Horizoncompact2 GSM900 BTS output power is 1.32 W (31.2 dBm), and 2.19 W (33.4 dBm) for the DCS1800 BTS. This value is reduced by the two metre connection cable to 1.2 W for GSM900 and 2.0 W for DCS1800 on input to the Horizoncompact2 booster.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 17
Specifications
GSM-209-323
Horizoncompact2 booster
Table 1-11 displays the Horizoncompact2 booster RF output power at antenna connector. Table 1-11 Horizoncompact2 booster RF output power Equipment Booster GSM900 Booster DCS1800 Nominal 10 W 10 W Max 17.78 W 17.78 W Min 5.62 W 5.62 W dBm (nominal) 40 dBm +/2.5 dB 40 dBm +/2.5 dB
Table 1-12 shows the Horizoncompact2 booster in bypass mode RF output power at antenna connector. Table 1-12 Horizoncompact2 booster in bypass mode RF output power Equipment Booster GSM900 Booster DCS1800 Min watt 0.48 0.74 dBm > 26.8 dBm > 28.7 dBm
NOTE
With reference to the GSM900 booster only, the output at the transmitter within the booster in bypass mode is reduced more than the Horizoncompact2 BTS output due to losses through switches and filters within the booster.
Receiver sensitivity
The sensitivity of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS receiver is 107 dBm.
Tech. 18
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Specifications
Frequency band characteristics

BTS radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with the characteristics listed in Table 1-13. Table 1-13 Frequency band characteristics GSM900 Transmit frequency band (MHz) Receive frequency band (MHz) Transmit/receive duplex separation (MHz) Channel width (kHz) Minimum channel spacing (kHz) Number of channels Transmit frequency guard bands (MHz) Receive frequency guard bands (MHz) Transmit channel centre frequency (MHz) Receive channel centre frequency (MHz) 925 to 960 880 to 915 45 200 600 174 925.0 to 925.1 959.9 to 960.0 880.0 to 880.1 914.9 to 915.0 Even 10ths of a MHz from 925.2 to 959.8 Even 10ths of a MHz from 880.2 to 914.8 DCS1800 1805 to 1880 1710 to 1785 95 200 600 374 1805.0 to 1805.1 1879.9 to 1880.0 1710.0 to 1710.1 1784.9 to 1785.0 Even 10ths of a MHz from 1805.2 to 1879.8 Even 10ths of a MHz from 1710.2 to 1784.8

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 19
Specifications
GSM-209-323
Tech. 110
20th Sep 02
Chapter 2
Equipment enclosures

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323

BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS modules location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS components location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
i
21 21 22 23 24 24 24 25

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
iii
GSM-209-323
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
BTS enclosure
BTS enclosure
Overview of the BTS enclosure
The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 are designed to be wall or pole mounted. A mounting bracket is provided and, once this is in place, the complete Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 can easily be installed onto the bracket. The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 are provided with moulded covers which can be removed to allow access for maintenance purposes. All input and output cables (for example, ac power, HDSL and E1 lines) enter the enclosure via the underside. The external RF cables may be routed from either the top or bottom of the enclosure. All cables have specified routes between the enclosure body and each connector. The Horizonmicro2 has a built in duplexer and isolator/combiner module for Tx1/Rx output and input. The Horizoncompact2 does not contain a duplexer or isolator/combiner module in the chassis. The duplexer is located in the Horizoncompact2 booster for Tx/Rx output and input. There are two isolators; one in each transmit path from the dual transceiver (DTRX) module. The outputs go directly to the Horizoncompact2 booster.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 21
BTS enclosure
GSM-209-323
BTS modules location diagram

Figure 2-1 shows the locations of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 modules and components.
AC SUPPLY SOCKET AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE DUMMY CONNECTORS RX/TX CONNECTOR (External N-type RF connector) RDIS MODULE
DTRX MODULE (incorporating isolator modules)
Horizonmicro2 BTS
ig.081.rh
AC SUPPLY SOCKET AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (External N-type RF connector) DTRX MODULE (incorporating isolator modules) TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (External N-type RF connector) RX CABLE CONNECTOR (External N-type RF connector) RDIS MODULE
ig.081.rh
Horizoncompact2 BTS
Figure 2-1 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 modules and components

Tech. 22
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
BTS enclosure
BTS components location diagram

Figure 2-2 shows the location of BTS components and connectors.
AC-DC PSM
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTORS
DINO/RHINO
HDSL MODULES
BATTERY
CUSTOMER INTERFACE CLAMP
Front view
BATTERY CONNECTOR
MMI
ALARMS CONNECTOR FROM BOOSTER
LINE TERMINATION MODULE (RHINO SHOWN)
Underside view with battery removed
ig.084.rh
Figure 2-2 BTS component locations

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 23
Booster
GSM-209-323
Booster
Overview of the booster
The Horizoncompact2 booster is designed to be wall or pole mounted. A mounting bracket is provided and, once this is in place, the complete Horizoncompact2 booster can easily be installed onto the bracket. The Horizoncompact2 booster is provided with a moulded cover which can be removed to allow access for maintenance purposes. The cables for ac power, HDSL and E1 links enter via the underside of the unit. RF cables may be routed from either the top or bottom. There is a difference in the design between the GSM900 booster and DCS1800 booster (see Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4).
GSM900 booster diagram

Figure 2-3 shows the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster with cover removed.
AC POWER SOCKET
ANT1 TX1 ALARMS PLUG RX ANT2 TX2
Figure 2-3 GSM900 booster
Tech. 24
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Booster
DCS1800 booster diagram

Figure 2-4 shows the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster with cover removed.
ALARMS PLUG
RX
TX2
ANT1 AC POWER SOCKET ANT2 TX1
Figure 2-4 DCS1800 booster

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 25
Booster
GSM-209-323
Tech. 26
20th Sep 02
Chapter 3
Power supply system

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323

BTS power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply signals and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery pack diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of booster power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC supply socket connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power pin designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC BPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.
i
31 31 31 31 32 32 33 34 35 37 38 39 39 39 39 310 310 310 311 311

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
iii
GSM-209-323
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
BTS power supply system
BTS power supply system

Overview
The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 ac-dc power supply module (PSM) provides all internal voltages from single phase ac supply in the maximum input range 88 V to 264 V, 45 Hz to 66 Hz. Alarm signals relating to ac supply fail, low voltage disconnect imminent and power supply overtemperature are generated within the ac-dc PSM and fed to the MCU-m section of RDIS.
Components
The power supply system comprises:
S S S
An ac-dc power supply module (AC-DC PSM). A distribution board. A backup battery.
Location diagram
Figure 3-1 shows the location of the power supply system components.
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
AC-DC PSM
BATTERY
Figure 3-1 BTS power supply

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 31
BTS power supply module
GSM-209-323

Distribution board
The power supplies generated by the ac-dc PSM are distributed via the distribution board and used by the various modules listed in Table 3-1 below. The power supply levels are all controlled by the ac-dc PSM, there are no adjustable parameters. A battery provides an auxiliary power source in the event of ac supply failure. Figure 3-2 shows the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 distribution board.
CONN5
CONN1
CONN3 CONN4
BATTERY CONNECTOR CONN2
Figure 3-2 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 distribution board Table 3-1 displays the voltages on the ac-dc PSM connectors. Table 3-1 PSM connector voltages Connector CONN1 CONN2 CONN3 CONN4 NOTE Module DTRX 0 Battery RDIS DTRX 1 X X X X X X X X X +3.3 V +5 V X +8 V X +12 V X 12 V X +25 V X X X X
The supply output from ac-dc PSM CONN4 is connected directly to distribution board CONN5.
Tech. 32
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Power supply module

Figure 3-3 shows the power supply module and socket connector from supply cable.
SCREW TO SECURE SOCKET CONNECTOR TO PSM
ENSURE GASKET IS FITTED BEFORE ATTACHING SOCKET TO PLUG
SOCKET CONNECTOR FROM SUPPLY CABLE (see Figure 3-4)
Figure 3-3 Power supply module

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 33
GSM-209-323
AC power connections
Figure 3-4 shows the ac supply connector.
Figure 3-4 AC supply connector WARNING Local regulations may apply for different power cable colours.
Table 3-2 lists the ac power connections. Table 3-2 AC supply connections Pin Top 1 2 3 Earth Neutral Live Not used Use Blue or black Brown or red Not used Colour Green and yellow
Tech. 34
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
AC-DC PSM
AC-DC PSM description
The ac-dc power supply module is directly plugged into the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 distribution board, and provides:
S S S S
A total maximum output power of 170 W. Discrete voltages. Alarms. An ac supply for the enclosure heaters. An ac-dc converter sub-module using an 88 to 264 V ac single phase input, with power factor correction, converting it to a high line 360 V dc output. A dc-dc converter sub-module which takes the high line 360 V dc output of the previous sub-module and converts it to a +25 V dc supply which is used as follows: Routed to the dc-dc converters. Float charges the 22 V battery.
The ac-dc PSM consists of:

S
The dc-dc converters each use the +25 V dc input to generate the +3.3 V, +5 V, +8 V, +12 V, 12 V dc and 25 V dc outputs respectively for driving logic, interface and alarms. The ac supply for the two equipment heaters is fuse protected and controlled by a temperature dependent switch within the heaters. The module has a low voltage disconnect (LVD) relay which enables the ac-dc PSM to disconnect the battery once its voltage has reached a minimum level. This protects the battery from being fully discharged.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 35
GSM-209-323
AC-DC PSM block diagram

Figure 3-5 shows a functional block diagram of the ac-dc PSM.
AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
ALARM SIGNALS PL1 AC INPUT EMC FILTER WITH FUSE +3.3 V
+3.3 V
POWER FACTOR CORRECTED AC to 360 V DC
+5 V
+5 V
360 V DC to +25 V DC +8 V 110 V AC/230 V AC SWITCH +12 V +12 V +8 V CONN4
PL2 12 V PL3 12 V
+25 V
LVD RELAY
+25 V
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the ac-dc PSM

Tech. 36
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Power supply signals and interfaces

Table 3-3 lists the ac-dc PSM sense signals and interfaces. Table 3-3 ACDC PSM sense signal and interfaces Connector PL1 PL2 PL3 CONN4 Signal AC input AC switched output AC switched output +25 V switched output +3.3 V +5 V +8 V +12 V 12 V +25 V MF Fail LVD imminent Overtemperature (OT) alarm AC input failure. An alarm is signalled when the +25 V unswitched supply drops to 20.5 V. Monitors the temperature of the ac-dc PSM. For distribution to the various modules. Remarks Single phase input, via EMC filter. RDIS heater supply. DTRX heater supply. Used to float charge the battery and provides battery backup.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 37
GSM-209-323
Events and alarms

The power supply system can generate a number of events to indicate its status. These events are sent as warnings or alarms to the OMC-R and in some cases can directly shut down the BTS. For details of OMC-R alarms, refer to the manual Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-R (GSM-100-501). The events that can be generated by the power supply system are described below:
S
Mains fail (MF) alarm An alarm is generated if the input to the ac-dc converter falls to within 65 to 78 V ac. All other power supplies remain active, maintained by the battery backup.
Low voltage disconnect imminent (LVDI) warning After an ac supply failure (ac-dc converter fail) the BTS continues to function using the battery backup. During this time the +22 V output is monitored and, if the output voltage falls to +20.5 V (+/0.5 V dc), an LVDI warning is generated.
Battery low voltage disconnect (battery LVD) shutdown If the output voltage continues to fall and reaches the range +18 V (+/0.5 V dc), a battery LVD signal is generated and the battery is disconnected from the load.
Under temperature (UT) inhibit Temp 1 (T1) is the trip level temperature (0 C, for under temperature). When power is first applied, if T1 is below 0 C the heater mats come on and the output of the +3.3 V, +5 V, +8 V, +12 V and 12 V converters are not enabled until the temperature has exceeds 0 C (trip level).
Overtemperature (OT) alarm Temp 2 (T2) is the trip level temperature (90 to 100 C, typically 90 C for overtemperature). An alarm is generated when the temperature at the ac-dc PSM heatsink reaches T2 5 C, typically 85 C.
Overtemperature shutdown If the temperature continues to rise and reaches T2, the ac-dc PSM is shutdown. After such a shutdown, the ac-dc PSM is only allowed to reactivate when a temperature of Temp 3 (T3) is reached (55 C to 80 C, typically 65 C). A hysterisis (H) of 20 C is used to prevent oscillation between ac-dc PSM shutdown and reactivation. Reactivation is automatic.
Tech. 38
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Battery backup
Battery backup
Purpose
The power system incorporates a battery backup that maintains power in the event of an ac supply failure. The battery is able to supply sufficient power (for a minimum of five minutes) for the system to perform all the tasks necessary for an orderly shutdown.
Description
The standard battery pack is made up from eleven lead-acid 2 volt cells, enclosed in a plastic case. The battery is sealed and never needs topping up. Expected life of the battery is approximately five years. The output is protected by a 20 A blade fuse, accessible from the top of the pack. The 22 V battery is connected to the +25 V dc switched supply line, which charges the battery pack under supply healthy conditions. The ac-dc PSM monitors the +25 V dc switched supply during battery backup conditions. It generates an alarm when it reaches the LVD imminent level (20.5 V) and ultimately de-energizes the battery disconnect relay when the output drops to 18 V.
Battery pack diagram

Figure 3-6 shows the battery pack with blade fuse.
BLADE FUSE (20 A)
Figure 3-6 Battery pack showing blade fuse

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 39
Booster power supply
GSM-209-323

Overview of booster power supply
The booster power supply comprises:
S
An ac-dc booster power supply module (BPSM) provides all internal voltages from single phase ac supply in the nominal range 88 V to 264 V, 45 Hz to 66 Hz, maximum output of 150 W (GSM900) or 215 W (DCS1800). Two power outputs provide +12 V dc and +28 V dc (GSM900) or +26 V dc (DCS1800).
AC supply socket connector

Figure 3-7 shows the location of the power supply socket connector from the supply cable.
GSM900 VERSION POWER SOCKET EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW)
DCS1800 VERSION
(NOT USED) NEUTRAL LIVE (BROWN OR RED) (BLUE OR BLACK) AC POWER SOCKET
(NOT USED)
LIVE (BROWN OR RED)
AC POWER PLUG ON BOOSTER
NOTE
The BPSM is located within the booster case and is not accessible. Figure 3-7 Booster power supply connections
Tech. 310
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
AC power pin designations

WARNING Local regulations may apply for different power cable colours.
Table 3-2 lists the ac power connections. Table 3-4 AC supply connections Pin Top 1 2 3 Earth Neutral Line Not used Use Colour Green and yellow Blue or black Brown or red Not used
AC-DC BPSM
The ac-dc BPSM provides:
S S
A total maximum output of 150 W of power. Discrete voltages. An ac-dc converter sub-module using an 88 to 264 V ac single phase input, with power correction. An ac-dc inverter which generates the +12 V dc, +28 V dc (GSM900 version) +26 V dc (DSC1800 version) for driving the amplifiers.
The ac-dc BPSM consists of:

S S
The ac input is fused for live and neutral lines, then EMC filtered. The next stage consists of a rectifier and input current limiting. This is followed by a power factor correction stage. Finally, a current mode, pulse width modulation (PWM) controlled inverter stage produces the outputs.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 311
GSM-209-323
Functional diagram
Figure 3-8 shows a functional block diagram of the ac-dc BPSM.
INPUT
V100-1 FUSE L (2) N (1) J100-4 TB13 E FUSE INPUT FILTER RECTIFIER CURRENT LIMITER POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
CORRECTOR CONTROL
INVERTER
OUTPUT
+28 V J3011 GSM900 J3012 OR J3001 +26 V J3002 DCS1800 J3013 J3014 J3003 J3004 0V 0V
OUTPUT
+12 V J300S J301S
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
AUXILIARY REGULATOR
+12 V
PWM CONTROL
Figure 3-8 Functional block diagram of the acdc BPSM

Tech. 312
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Interfaces
Table 3-5 lists the ac-dc BPSM sense signal and interfaces. Table 3-5 BPSM interfaces Connector INPUT L (2) (V100-1) N (1) (J100-4) E (TB13) OUTPUT Signal AC input Remarks Single phase input, via filter.
+28 V dc (GSM900) OR +26 V dc (DCS1800)
For distribution to the amplifiers.
J301-1 J301-2 J300-1 J300-2 J301-3 J301-4 J300-3 J300-4 OUTPUT J300-S J301-S 0 V dc For distribution to the amplifiers.
+12 V dc
For distribution to the amplifiers and the alarm board.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 313
GSM-209-323
Tech. 314
20th Sep 02
Chapter 4
Digital modules

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323

Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDIS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main control unit, micro (MCU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68LC060 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICC32 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU-m block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic board ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic site ID and calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of ORAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORAC functional blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY/SCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORAC functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing section of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface framers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signalling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagram of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology for Tx and Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL link options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
i
Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. 41 41 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 46 47 47 48 48 48 49 410 411 412 412 413 413 414 414 414 414 415 415 415 416 416 416
68P02902W62-O
iii
GSM-209-323
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Digital modules
Digital modules
Overview of digital modules
The digital modules within Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 consist of the following:
S S S S
Radio digital interface system (RDIS) module. DINO/RHINO module. High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module. Line termination modules.
RDIS module
The RDIS is the digital control module containing the main control unit micro (MCU-m) and the olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC). The MCU-m is customized to drive two ORACs, each support a single GSM RF carrier. The RDIS provides the processing platform for the control software, the main software functions being:
S S S S S
Call processing (CP). Cell resource manager (CRM). Radio resource state machine (RRSM). Switching. Support of DTRX connection is made to two ORACs.
DINO/RHINO module
The DINO/RHINO module provides the functionality required to interface with the network. The DINO/RHINO supports E1 interfaces.
HDSL module
The HDSL module enables E1 data rates to be transmitted as payloads shared over two twisted-pair cables. NOTE Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.
Line termination modules

The following modules are used to terminate the 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) links and HDSL 135 ohm links:
S S
DINO termination module - 120 ohm (DINO E1/HDSL module). RHINO termination module - 75 ohm (RHINO E1/HDSL module).
20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 41
Main control unit, micro (MCU-m)
GSM-209-323

Overview of MCU-m
The main control unit, micro (MCU-m) module provides the following functions:
S S S S S
Control processing. Crosspoint switch. BTS master clock synchronization. Timing. RSS processing (for both ORACs).
The processing supports the BTS site processing and fault management, together with BTS call processing (RRSM and CRM). The crosspoint switch provides switching for the network interfaces and the two ORAC functional blocks.
Processor functionality
The MCU-m processing section provides a 68LC060 processor in companion mode with a QUICC32. The QUICC32 is used to provide system integration and peripheral functions, specifically, a 32 channel HDLC controller for the DTRX-BCF links. The main processing section of the MCU-m currently supports 16 Mbytes of RAM. The DRAM system implements an ECC system for high data integrity. The boot up code is stored in a 2 Mbyte flash EPROM. A further 1 Mbyte of flash EPROM is provided for non volatile data storage. A code storage facility processor (CSFP) is supported via a PCMCIA interface. This allows flash memory cards of various sizes to be fitted.
68LC060 processor
The 68LC060 has a clock operating speed of 50 MHz with a bus speed of 25 MHz (the reduced bus speed is due to the use of the QUICC32 in companion mode). The on-board memory management unit (MMU) provides write protection of memory areas, particularly program storage areas.
Tech. 42
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
QUICC32 processor
The QUICC32 processor is a pin compatible derivative of the 68360. There are minor hardware changes and microcode changes which permit the serial communications channel (SCCI) to operate as a 32 channel HDLC controller, utilizing the CPM RISC controller to perform the processing. The QUICC32 processor operates at 25 MHz. This also defines the external bus speed of the 68LC060 processor. The on-board system integration features of the QUICC32 provide peripheral control functions to support the 68LC060 processor.
MCU-m block diagram

Figure 4-1 shows a functional block diagram of the MCU-m module.
SIGNAL CONNECTOR SYSTEM RESET AND MASTER PROCESSOR WARM RESET (FROM DINO/RHINO) RESET LOGIC XTAL
PLL CONTROL DATA ADDRESS COMMS PROCESSOR (QUICC32)
RS232
MMI
BTP (68LC060)
SITE ID
BERR
ECC PCMCIA INTERFACE PCMCIA
16Mb DRAM FAST FLASH (BOOTCODE & EXECUTIVE) SLOW FLASH (SWFM) 2 2 DINO/RHINO LINKS ORAC 2 LINKS 2 EXTRACTED CLOCKS FROM DINO/RHINO
CROSSPOINT SWITCH SYNC
Figure 4-1 MCU-m functional block diagram

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 43
GSM-209-323
PCMCIA interface
The loading and storage of software may be done via the PCMCIA interface. The PCMCIA socket is an industry standard 68-pin single socket, accessible from the underside of the enclosure when the MMI cover plate is removed. The PCMCIA interface is controlled using a Cirrus Logic PC card socket controller. The PCMCIA interface is provided to support rev 2.1 type I cards.
Crosspoint switch
This application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) provides central switching capabilities for the MCU-m. It switches TDM links between two ORACs, two network interfaces and two links to the processing section, one link to the sync processor and also two links for the expansion fibre optics. The ASIC also provides link interface features associated with the ORAC links, these include synchronization features to allow for delay in the link to the ORAC, and the necessary framing and encoding to support the link. All of the serial links into the ASIC are E1, 125 ms frame, 32 eight-bit timeslots per frame.
Sync block
The sync block is responsible for site synchronization functions. It generates all required local references from a high stability local clock source, taking 15 minutes to stabilize from warm-up. This clock source may also be locked to the incoming network clocks. The sync block provides the following reference pulses and reference clock:
S S S S
16.384 MHz 125 ms 60 ms 6.12 s
The sync function is controlled by the main processing section via a parallel port. The clock select block receives all of the possible sources of reference signal:
S
Extracted clock from the DINO/RHINO.
One of the sources is selected as a reference and up to two others can be monitored and prioritized as backup references should the primary reference fail. The sync block can also operate in free-running mode, using the ovenized voltage controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO). NOTE The OXCO requires calibration when the frame-slip alarm threshold is exceeded. This should only occur a few times in the life of the equipment, due to the slow ageing characteristic of the OCXO.
The PLL uses the selected reference signal as the loop reference clock. It includes an OCXO (accurate to 0.05 ppm), a phase comparator and a loop filter.
Tech. 44
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
MMI interface
The main processing section is provided with a TTY interface to the QUICC32. This interface does not support hardware handshaking. The serial ports support a baud rate of 9.6 kbit/s (no parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits per character).
Electronic board ID
Electronic board ID is supported by the slow flash memory (non-volatile data memory). This storage contains the following information:
S S S
RDIS module serial number 16 bytes. Kit number 16 bytes. Description 32 bytes.
Electronic site ID and calibration data

A programmable site ID feature is provided using a serial EPROM.
Memory system
The RDIS has on-board memory devices and associated circuitry which is used to enable initialization of the ORAC and DTRX, and store the site ID.
Functional description and diagram

The memory system consists of three memory blocks and some arbitration logic, as shown in Figure 4-2. The ORAC and DTRX memory contains calibration and information data associated with the cabinet equipment. The arbitration logic allows the exchange of the DTRX/ORAC memory information between the two ORACs. The MCU-m memory contains the site identification number and the kit number of the board on which it is stored. This information can be read via the MCU-m at the TTY plug.
RDIS SITE EEPROM ORAC EEPROM ORAC0 DTRX EEPROM ARBITRATION LOGIC ORAC1
MCU-m
Figure 4-2 EEPROM functional block diagram

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 45
Olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC) function
GSM-209-323

Overview of ORAC
Each ORAC is part of the RDIS and is designed to support a single, dual-rate basic GSM RF carrier.
ORAC functional blocks

Each ORAC consists of the following functional blocks:
ORAC system controller and router (OSCAR) processor

The OSCAR processor performs the control functions for the OSCAR to MCU-m interface, channel codec control, TTY link and PA control.
Equalizer
The equalizer performs channel equalisation for a single RF carrier.
Channel codecs
The channel codecs perform:
S S S
Channel coding/decoding. Interleaving/de-interleaving. Speech transacting.
Transceiver interface control (TIC)

The TIC performs low level management of the DTRX:
S S S S
A/D conversion. Modulation/demodulation control. Tx power control. Synthesizer interface.
Serial communications interface (SCI)

Slow serial interface for TTY and control.
Synchronous serial interface (SSI)

Fast serial interface for communication between DSPs. The functional blocks above are shown in Figure 4-3, the lines representing the interfaces between the main processing sections of the module. The channel codec blocks and equalizer block contain multiple processors.
Tech. 46
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
TTY/SCI
Each processor has a TTY port available; for example the OSCAR, channel codecs and equalizer. The Horizoncompact2 booster internal alarms flexi-cable connects from the 9-way alarms input through to the test TTY access port (connection is made to each ORAC).
ORAC functional diagram

Figure 4-3 shows a functional block diagram of the ORAC module.
CHANNEL CODECS PRIVATE BUS SCI SSI UPLINK BUS CONTROL BUS SCI PARALLEL BUS (HOST INTERFACE) TEST TTY ACCESS (BOOSTER ALARMS) ITC ASIC EQUALIZER
SCI SCI (MMI) ROUTEING INTERFACE
OSCAR TTY
From MCU-m SECTION
OSCAR PROCESSOR
DTRX MODULE
TRAFFIC SSI LINK
TDM INTERFACE
Tx Rx
2 MBit/s TDM DATA To MCU-m SECTION
Figure 4-3 ORAC functional block diagram

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 47
DINO/RHINO module
GSM-209-323
DINO/RHINO module
Overview of DINO/RHINO
The DINO/RHINO module provides the interface to the network. This function is separated from the MCU-m section of RDIS due to the variety of interfaces that can be provided.
S S
The DINO board provides a 120 ohm twisted pair E1 or 135 ohm twisted pair HDSL interface. The RHINO board provides a 75 ohm coax E1 or 135 ohm twisted pair HDSL interface.
A local microcontroller is provided for network interface configuration and supervision. This is controlled by the MCU-m and communicates with the DINO/RHINO microcontroller via a HDLC link.
Location of DINO/RHINO
The DINO/RHINO module is fitted between the RDIS and DTRX modules. Figure 4-4 shows the location of the optional DINO/RHINO module (which incorporates the LIU) and HDSL modules.
FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTORS FOR EXPANSION CONNECTIONS
DINO/RHINO (DTRX OMITTED FOR CLARITY) HDSL MODEMS

ig.084.rh
Figure 4-4 DINO/RHINO location

Tech. 48
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
DINO/RHINO module
Module view of DINO/RHINO

Figure 4-5 shows a DINO/RHINO module and an external view of the TTY connector with switches on the MMI cover plate.
HDSL MODULES FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTORS (FOR MASTER AND SLAVE FRU CONNECTIONS)
RDIS CONNECTOR NETWORK INTERFACE MODULE
MASTER PROCESSOR WARM RESET BUTTON (S2) GREEN LED SYSTEM RESET BUTTON (S1) MMI COVER PLATE TTY CONNECTOR (MMI OF RDIS)
LINE TERMINATION MODULE
ig.085.rh
Figure 4-5 DINO/RHINO with HDSL modules and TTY connector and switches

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 49
DINO/RHINO module
GSM-209-323
DINO/RHINO functional diagram

Figure 4-6 identifies the functional blocks in the DINO/RHINO.
BOARD CONNECTORS
SYSTEM RESET (S1) RESET
XTAL J6 BDM CONTROL PROCESSOR DATA DRAM J3 RS232
GREEN LED
J9 HDSL LINK 1 HLI FLASH EPROM
ADDRESS
DINO/RHINO RXD DINO/RHINO TXD GND
T O R D I S
HDSL MODULE T O E 1 HDSL MODULE J8
CONTROL DATA/CLK DUART CONTROL DATA/CLK
J3 DINO/RHINO RXD DINO/RHINO TXD GND SYSTEM RESET
J8 HDSL LINK 2 HLI J4 (DINO) J14/J15/16/17 (RHINO) NETWORK LINK 0 T O E 1 LIU FRAMER
9-WAY (J4)
FRAMER
NETWORK LINK 1
LIU
MASTER PROCESSOR WARM RESET (S2) MMI CONNECTOR
BOARD CONNECTORS
Figure 4-6 DINO/RHINO functional block diagram

Tech. 410

DISTANCE MEASURING, PATTERN INSERT AND DETECT
STROBE
2.048 MBIT/S MAIN LINK 0 LINK 1
MUX DEMUX
REF_6.12S REF_125mS 2.048 MBIT/S
STOP
COUNTER
START
PROCESSOR BUS
MCU-m RESET SWITCH
MMI TTY
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
DINO/RHINO module
Processing section of DINO/RHINO

The processing section comprises a MC68360 microcontroller with 8 Mbit (256k x 32 words) DRAM and 8 Mbit (512k x 16 words) flash EPROM. The flash memory is partitioned into two banks of 256k x 16 words to assist in code corruption immunity (CCI). Both banks of memory contain the same operational code in order to allow the processor to boot from either bank (redundant or main). This is a safety procedure, in the event of code becoming corrupted. The processor provides integrated features such that it requires little peripheral support. It communicates with the MCU-m via a HDLC link.
Flash EPROM
The flash EEPROM stores the following:
S S S
Boot code. Operational code. Electronic ID.
The boot code executes on reset, performing board level tests before transferring execution to the operational code. The operational code will then allow the HDLC link to the MCU-m to be established. The MCU-m may then request a code load of the DINO/RHINO to be performed.
Electronic ID
The electronic board ID stores the following information:
S S
Board serial number 16 bytes. Board kit number 16 bytes.
TTY port
The TTY connector (J7) on the DINO/RHINO is the master processor/MCU-m TTY port. A TTY for debugging the DINO/RHINO is available on the RDIS test connector.
LED status
Table 4-1 displays the system status LED.
Table 4-1 System status LED Green LED Status
Off On
System power off System power on

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 411
DINO/RHINO module
GSM-209-323
Resets
The processor is capable of soft resetting itself. A local power-on reset circuit is provided. This provides a local reset based on the power supply tolerance. The MCU-m is able to reset the DINO/RHINO via a message on the HDLC link only.
Reset switches
There are two push button switches mounted on the DINO/RHINO board which provides the following:
S
System reset (S1) When depressed briefly and then released, on board circuitry provides a timed hard reset of the DINO/RHINO board and RDIS board.
Master processor warm reset (S2) When depressed briefly and then released, on board circuitry provides a warm reset to the MCU-m section of the RDIS module.
The reset switches are located on the DINO/RHINO to provide better access to this function when the system is fully configured in the chassis.
Line interface framers

The framing devices provide analogue to digital conversions for encode/decode of the E1/T1 interfaces, and for HDSL modules when fitted and selected by software (E1 only). The framers provide the decoded and jitter attenuated receive data, for passing to the MCU-m, plus a version of the data that has not been through the jitter buffer which can be used on board the DINO/RHINO for distance measurement. NOTE Although distance measuring can be made operational, it is not a feature of current software.
The framers provide a 2.048 MHz extracted clock, passed to the MCU-m. The transmit and receive framing is controlled by a 125 ms reference pulse received from the MCU-m.
Tech. 412
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
DINO/RHINO module
Radio signalling links

The radio signalling links (RSLs) to the BSC from the main processor on the MCU-m are 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s LAPD links. The MCU-m does not perform the LAPD encoding of the RSL link data. This is performed on the DINO/RHINO by the processor. The DINO/RHINO supports a maximum of two RSL links. The RSL links may both be on a single network link or shared between the two network links. NOTE When the DINO/RHINO is on a network link to a BSC, the RSL can be placed on either line on any timeslot other than zero.
The DINO/RHINO supports 64 kbit/s and 16 kbit/s LAPD channels.
HDSL interface
Control
The HDSL modules are controlled from the processor by an asynchronous serial data stream. There are two separate control channels, one per HDSL module. The control streams are sourced by a dual universal asynchronous receiver transmitter (DUART) device on the processor bus of the DINO/RHINO.
Clock and data

The HDSL module interfaces directly to the framer interface/framer devices. The HDSL sourced data is selected as the input and output data path by the control processor. Both clock and data are used in both transmit and receive directions.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 413
High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module
GSM-209-323
High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module

Overview of HDSL
NOTE Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.
The HDSL module enables E1 data rates to be transmitted as payloads shared over two twisted-pair cables. These cables are generally unshielded standard telephone cables.
Functional description of HDSL

The HDSL data operates bidirectionally over each twisted-pair at approximately half the overall E1 data rate. The module processor performs such tasks as error monitoring and start-up configuration. The processor also communicates with the DINO/RHINO processor via an asynchronous control port. The raw HDSL signals from the module are routed through the DINO/RHINO and then translated at the HLI functional block (see Figure 4-6) into true HDSL level signals.
Functional diagram of HDSL

Figure 4-7 shows the HDSL module functional blocks.
BIDIRECTIONAL BALANCED LINE TO HLI
BIDIRECTIONAL BALANCED LINE TO HLI CLOCK DATA
CLOCK DATA
CONTROL
Figure 4-7 HDSL module functional block

Tech. 414
DSP HDSL FRAMER DSP
ANALOGUE FRONT END
ANALOGUE FRONT END
FLASH PROCESSOR NVRAM
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323

Overview of line termination modules
The following modules are used to terminate the 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) links and high speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) 135 ohm links:
S S
DINO termination module - 120 ohm (DINO E1/HDSL module). RHINO termination module - 75 ohm (RHINO E1/HDSL module).
Connector location diagram

Figure 4-8 shows the DINO/RHINO connectors and location of the line termination module.
J3 (MMI)
ALARMS CONNECTOR FROM BOOSTER (ACTIVE ON HORIZONCOMPACT2 ONLY)
DINO (E1/HDSL)
J11 J13 J12
RHINO (E1/HDSL)
J14 J15 J16 J17 J13 J12
DINO LABEL
ALARM PORT PIN TX 1 & 6 A RX 2 & 7
J11
PORT PIN TX 3 & 8 B RX 4 & 9 INTERNAL SLAVE
J13
INTERNAL MASTER
HDSL OPTION
J12
RHINO LABEL
ALARM
J14
TX A
J15
RX A
J16
TX B
J17
RX B
INTERNAL SLAVE
J13
INTERNAL MASTER
HDSL OPTION
J12
Figure 4-8 Connector location diagram

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 415
GSM-209-323
Terminology for Tx and Rx

The use of Tx and Rx as driver/receiver designators refer to the network as perceived by the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure:
S
Tx indicates the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 connection is driving into the network. Rx indicates the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 connection is receiving from the network.
Features of line termination modules

The line termination modules provide:
S
Impedance matching between the E1 and HDSL circuit lines and the DINO/RHINO module. An interface for up to two inputs and two outputs (120 ohm balanced DINO or 75 ohm unbalanced RHINO E1 lines), or two HDSL 135 ohm looped pairs.
HDSL link options

In HDSL equipped variants, the links are automatically configured as either E1 or HDSL via a combination of database settings and auto-detection mechanisms. A feature of GSR4 software and later releases enables the setting of the master/slave defaults to be changed by database settings for scenarios where the defaults are not appropriate, such as a closed loop daisy chain. In this instance, an external modem from the BSC must be a slave. The slave modem on the last Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 must be turned into a master in order to communicate with the BSC. (See the configuration example later in this section.) NOTE Software releases prior to GSR4 cannot access the above feature.
Links can be either E1 or HDSL, and can be mixed as appropriate within the network. Conversion to/from E1 and HDSL can be performed either at a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 or by use of external HDSL modems. Three examples of possible configurations are shown below.
Tech. 416
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
E1 link connection to BSC

In this configuration (see Figure 4-9) an E1 link is used from the BSC to the first Horizonmicro2 (BTS ) or Horizoncompact2 (BTS). Here, the connection is made to the J11 port in the DINO board or to one of the coaxial cable connectors (J14, J15, J16, or J17) on the RHINO board. From the first BTS onwards, HDSL links are used running from slave port (DINO/RHINO J13) to the master port (DINO/RHINO J12) in each BTS. On the DINO/RHINO boards there are two fibre optic channels of 2.048 Mbit/s, allowing two further BTSs to be interconnected. The fibre optic channel allows synchronization of the slave BTSs with the master BTS.
E1 LINK
S HDSL LINK BTS S = SLAVE
M HDSL LINK BTS
BSC
M = MASTER
BTS
NOTE
The remaining link on the last BTS could be used to perform a closed loop configuration with an E1 link.
FIBRE OPTIC LINK
E1 LINK M
FIBRE OPTIC LINK
S BTS
S BTS
BSC
M = MASTER
BTS S = SLAVE
Figure 4-9 HDSL and fibre optic interconnections

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 417
GSM-209-323
External modem connection to BSC

In this configuration (see Figure 4-10), a BSC connects to an external modem through an E1 link. A connection is then made from the external modem slave port to the master port (DINO/RHINO J12) on the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 DINO/RHINO. The slave port of the BTS (DINO/RHINO J13), connects to the next BTS master port (DINO/RHINO J12) and so on, until the last BTS port is connected.
E1 LINK HDSL HDSL
SLAVE EXTERNAL MODEM
HDSL
BSC
M = MASTER
BTS
BTS
BTS
S = SLAVE
NOTE
Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for use with Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTSs. Figure 4-10 External modem connection to BSC
External modem connection to BSC (closed loop)

This closed loop configuration (see Figure 4-11) uses external modems through an E1 link in order to connect to the BSC. A connection is made from the external modem slave port to the master port on the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 (DINO/RHINO J12). The slave port of the BTS (DINO J1, RHINO J13), connects to the next BTS master port (DINO/RHINO J12) and so on, until the last BTS port is connected. The slave port on the last BTS (DINO/RHINO J13), is reconfigured via software to be a master port. The reconfiguration of the port (DINO/RHINO J13) on the last BTS allows the loop to be closed via the use of an external HDSL modem.
E1 LINK SLAVE EXTERNAL MODEM E1 LINK SLAVE EXTERNAL MODEM S = SLAVE BTS BTS BTS HDSL M S HDSL M S HDSL M M HDSL
BSC
M = MASTER
Figure 4-11 External modem connection to BSC (closed loop) NOTE Software releases prior to GSR4 cannot access the above closed loop configuration. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem.
Tech. 418
20th Sep 02
Chapter 5
RF modules

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Overview of RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 51 Location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 52 Dual transceiver (DTRX) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DTRX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synthesizer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non volatile storage of calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmicro2 duplexer and combiner/isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer and combiner/ isolator diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rx/Tx interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizoncompact2 isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolator module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rx/Tx interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech. 53 53 53 55 58 511 511 512 512 512 513 513 514 514 514 515 515 516 516 517 518

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
iii
GSM-209-323
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Overview of RF modules
Introduction
The RF modules consist of:
S S
Dual transceiver module (DTRX). Isolator modules. NOTE To avoid problems with dust contamination of the fibre optics it is very important that the dust covers are kept in place on the fibre optic plugs at all times the cables are not connected. Please strictly observe the warning label affixed on the DTRX module.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 51
GSM-209-323
Location diagram
Figure 5-1 shows the location of the RF modules on the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.
AC POWER SOCKET
DTRX MODULE ISOLATOR/COMBINER MODULE AND DUPLEXER
RDIS MODULE
Horizonmicro2
DUMMY CONNECTORS RX/TX1/TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR (External N-type RF connector) AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
AC POWER SOCKET
DTRX MODULE INCORPORATING ISOLATOR MODULE
RDIS MODULE
Horizoncompact2
TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (External N-type RF connector)
TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (External N-type RF connector)
RX CABLE CONNECTOR (External N-type RF connector)
Figure 5-1 RF module locations

Tech. 52
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Dual transceiver (DTRX) module

Overview of DTRX module
The DTRX module supports dual RF transceivers which operate in either the GSM900 or DCS1800 frequency bands. The DTRX module supports synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH) and dynamic power control (but not for the BCCH carrier). The DTRX module does not support base band hopping or receive spatial diversity.
Synthesizer section
Introduction
The synthesizer blocks are located with the Rx and Tx circuits and used for the RF and IF frequency synthesis. There are a total of 13 phase-lock loops required on the DTRX module, eight frequency synthesizers and five phase-locked oscillators. The phase-locked oscillators are used for the IF local oscillators. The master 13 MHz reference oscillator is phase-locked to a 16.384 MHz reference supplied from the RDIS digital module and, together with digital dividers, provides reference frequencies for all other PLLs. The subsystem supports synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH).
Functional description
The phase-locked loops of the DTRX module are:
S S S S S
13 MHz master reference. Transmit RF frequency synthesizer (TXRFLO) x4. Transmit IF phase-locked oscillator (TXIFLO) x2. Receive RF frequency synthesizer (RXRFLO) x4. Receive IF phase-locked oscillator (RXIFLO) x2.
13 MHz reference distribution

The purpose of the reference distribution is to generate and distribute reference signals of the correct frequency and amplitude to all the synthesizers and oscillators on the DTRX module. A synchronizing 13 MHz clock is returned to the RDIS digital module.
RF synthesizers
The operation of the eight RF synthesizers supplying the Rx and Tx chains are identical. They are combined in pairs to enable SFH. Whilst one of the pair of synthesizers is providing the local oscillator, the other is locking to the next channel in the frequency hopping sequence.
20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 53
GSM-209-323
IF oscillators
The four IF oscillators are basically the same but the transmit and receive synthesizers use different reference frequencies and phase detector comparison frequencies.
Alarms
Synthesizer alarms are:
S S S
Tx synthesizer lock alarm. Rx synthesizer lock alarm. 13 MHz synthesizer lock.
Synthesizer functional block diagram

Figure 4-8 shows the synthesizer functional blocks.
RF INJECTION PLL RF INJECTION PLL RF INJECTION PLL RF INJECTION PLL RF INJECTION PLL RF INJECTION PLL
13 MHz Reference
RXRFLO (Carrier 0) (A) RXRFLO (Carrier 0) (B) TXRFLO (Carrier 0) (A) TXRFLO (Carrier 0) (B) RXRFLO (Carrier 1) (A) RXRFLO (Carrier 1) (B) TXRFLO (Carrier 1) (A) TXRFLO (Carrier 1) (B) TXIFLO (Carrier 0) TXIFLO (Carrier 1) RXIFLO (Carrier 0) RXIFLO (Carrier 1)
13 MHz Reference
16.348 MHz CLOCK (from RDIS)
REFERENCE SYNTHESIZER 13 MHz Reference
13 MHz Reference (to RDIS) 13 MHz Reference
RF INJECTION PLL RF INJECTION PLL
DIVIDE by 13 1 MHz Reference
IF INJECTION PLO IF INJECTION PLO IF INJECTION PLO IF INJECTION PLO
DIVIDE by 5 200 kHz Reference
Figure 5-2 Synthesizer functional block diagram

Tech. 54
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Receiver section
Introduction to the receiver
The receiver is a double conversion super-heterodyne that can operate in two modes; linear and limiting. When the receiver is looking for call initiation from a mobile station on a RACH, it is switched to limiting mode as no estimate of signal strength is available to set the AGC pads. In normal operation on a SDCCH or TCH, the receiver operates in linear mode. This allows the amplitude information to be retained, which is required by the channel equalizers.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 55
GSM-209-323
Functional description of the receiver

In the Horizonmicro2 both Rx and Tx use a common antenna and so a duplexer is used to provide isolation between them. The response of the duplexer also acts as preselection for the low noise amplifier (LNA). This stage is missing within the Horizoncompact2 as the duplexer is found within the booster, thus only one signal passes directly into the LNA. The RF signal passes through an LNA stage and then through a splitter. One arm feeds carrier 0 whilst the other feeds carrier 1. A bandpass filter provides rejection to out-of-band blockers. The mixer down-converts the signal to an IF using a low-side RXRFLO. A diplexer at the output of the mixer provides a wideband match to the mixer to prevent reflections causing unwanted spurious signals. An AGC pad is available at this point to reduce the dynamic range requirement for the IF strip. Three SAW filters provide some channel filtering, reject the unwanted mixer components and ease the 3rd order intermodulation products (IP3) requirements of the backend. The IF signal is then amplified and split into two paths; one is the limited path, the other is the linear path. The limited signal can be switched back into the main signal path. During linear operation, the magnitude of the baseband output (I+Q) is monitored to feed back to the AGC algorithm, ensuring that the baseband output is maintained at the required level. However, in limiting operation, the magnitude of baseband output (I+Q) does not reflect the incoming signal strength due to the operation of the hard limiter. The signal strength can be derived, however, by monitoring the output of the limiters RSSI port. The dynamic range of the receiver is 107 dBm to 15 dBm. There is a switchable 40 dB pad (known as AGC7) at the front of the IF strip which reduces the compression of the IF strip to an achievable level. The baseband output to the A/D converters is ideally maintained at 1/2 full scale (2.5 V pkpk or 12 dBm) using the AGC pads which are controlled by the equalizer algorithm and set by AGC calibration. AGC7 effectively reduces the dynamic range for the remainder of the receiver from 107 dBm to 55 dBm. Hence there is a remaining 49 dB of AGC requirement to be taken up in AGC06. This is provided by a voltage variable amplifier which is controlled by a DAC from the AGC word. The active demodulator provides I & Q channel data at baseband by using RXIFLO from the synthesizer at twice the required LO frequency. The baseband processing then filters the demodulated signal to reject the adjacent channels and to band limit the noise power. The signal is also amplified to the level required by the A/D converter. Also included is a group delay equalizer which flattens the variation caused by the baseband filtering.
Tech. 56
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Functional block diagram

Figure 5-3 shows the CARRIER 0 receiver path of the DTRX module. The CARRIER 1 receiver path is identical after the LNAs and splitter.
Rx_IN HORIZONMICRO2 DUPLEXER Rx_IN HORIZONCOMPACT2
CARRIER 1 PATH LPF LNA 1 LNA 2 RXRFLO TEMPERATURE DETECTOR DIPLEXER RF FILTER MIXER 1 Rx_TEMP_0 SAW
AMP AGC7 0/40 dB 1
RSSI_0 AGC AMP SWITCH 50 Ohms

I&Q DEMOD
SAW AMP 2 AMP 3
SAW CAL AGC 1a CAL AGC 1b
LIMIT/LOG AMP AMP 4
I BRANCH
BPF
90_
I_0
CAL AGC
Q BRANCH
Q_0 RXIFLO
BASEBAND PROCESSING
Figure 5-3 Rx functional block diagram

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 57
GSM-209-323
Transmitter section
Introduction to the transmitter
The transmitter section of the DTRX module takes in digital information from the RDIS module and oscillator and reference signals from the synthesizer section. It generates the IF, mixes it with the LO and amplifies the resultant RF signal. The final RF signal is fully modulated, filtered, power ramped and amplified. In the Horizonmicro2 the output signal passes to enclosure equipment which comprises the duplexer and combiner/isolator module. In the Horizoncompact2 each of the output signals from Tx1 and Tx2 are passed through two separate isolators before being forwarded to the Horizoncompact2 booster for amplification.
Tech. 58
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Functional description of the transmitter

The transmitter (Tx) takes digital baseband information from the RDIS module and converts it into a GMSK modulated signal. This modulated signal is mixed with the TXIFLO input, up-converted to the first IF, 175 MHz, then passed through:
S S
An amplification and narrow band filtering stage to remove unwanted sidebands (due to mixing of signals). A voltage variable attenuator (VVA) which provides signal level adjustment under control of the RDIS module (to compensate for power level changes). A voltage controlled amplifier (VCA) which provides more than 45 dB of power control (to ramp the signal up and down). An amplification and wideband filtering stage before being mixed with the TXRFLO input and being up-converted to the final RF frequency.
S S
After the second mixer, the signal is amplified and filtered before being passed through the second VVA. The function of this VVA is the same as the first. It forms part of a control loop in conjunction with the power detector. Both VVAs are also used to adjust the power output of the system, to account for the duplexer and combiner/isolator module. The signal is further amplified and filtered before being passed through a digital switched attenuator (DSA). This attenuator provides up to 30 dB of attenuation in discrete 2 dB steps, and is used for static/dynamic power control. It is controlled by signals from the RDIS module. In the Horizonmicro2 a RF power amplifier (PA) module with preceding stages of amplification increases the signal level up to approximately 30.8 dBm +/2.0 dB (GSM900 normal operation) or 30.0 dBm +/2.0 dB (DCS1800 normal operation). In the Horizoncompact2 a RF power amplifier (PA) module with preceding stages of amplification increases the signal level up to approximately 31.2 dBm +/1.5 dB (GSM900 normal operation) or 33.4 dBm +/1.5 dB (DCS1800 normal operation). A RF power detector monitors the power output, giving a usable output over 35 dB of range. The detector is temperature compensated. A temperature sensor is fitted to allow the RDIS module to determine the temperature of the PA module, for thermal protection.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 59
GSM-209-323
Functional block diagram

Figure 5-4 shows the CARRIER 0 transmitter path of the DTRX module. The CARRIER 1 transmitter path is identical.
CLOCK PASSIVE LPF TXIFLO NARROW BAND SAW BPF 175 MHz Voltage Variable Attenuator VCA VVA
MDATA
GMSK
7 MHz
MIXER DIVIDER
ENABLE PWR_RAMP_0 PWR_LEVEL_0 GAIN BLOCK

SAW BPF
MIXER
BPF BPF
BPF AMPLIFIER
VVA AMPLIFIER
TXRFLO TX_KEY
Digital Switched Attenuator BPF AMPLIFIER DIGITAL CONTROL SIGNAL DSA
RF PA Module Tx_OUT_0 RF POWER DETECTOR TEMPERATURE DETECTOR
FWD_PWR_0 Tx_TEMP
Figure 5-4 Tx functional block diagram
Tech. 510
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Temperature detectors
The purpose of the temperature detection is to allow the RDIS module to compensate for the temperature response of the DTRX module. The DTRX module is equipped with four temperature detectors. Two sensors are placed to detect the ambient temperature of the receivers and two placed to detect the temperature of the transmitter output stages. The outputs of the four detectors are then multiplexed onto two analogue detector lines selected by the TEMP_SEL control line (0 selects the transmitter and 1 selects the receiver). All the temperature sensors are identical and share common switching and signal connection circuitry. TEMP_SEL is changed only on timeslot boundaries and is sent with the AGC data through a serial link back to the RDIS.
Functional block diagram of temperature detectors

Figure 5-5 shows a functional block diagram of the temperature detectors.
TRANSMITTER TEMPERATURE DETECTOR
CARRIER 0
TEMP_SEL_0
RECEIVER TEMPERATURE DETECTOR
CARRIER 0 TEMP_DET_0 ANALOGUE SWITCH
TRANSMITTER TEMPERATURE DETECTOR
TEMP_DET_1 CARRIER 1
RECEIVER TEMPERATURE DETECTOR
CARRIER 1
TEMP_SEL_1
Figure 5-5 Temperature detectors functional block diagram
Non volatile storage of calibration data

The DTRX factory calibration data, which is controlled and used by the RDIS module, is stored in a 32 kbit (4 x 8 kbit) serial programmed EEPROM. This data is calibrated at manufacture.
20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 511
Horizonmicro2 duplexer and combiner/isolator
GSM-209-323

Overview of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator
The duplexer filters Tx and Rx signals between a single antenna and the DTRX. The Tx combiner/isolator module is used to combine the two transmit signal outputs into the duplexer and hence to one antenna.
Location of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator

Figure 5-6 shows the location of the duplexer, combiner/isolator module and DTRX board on the Horizonmicro2..
COMBINER/ISOLATOR MODULE
RX/TX ANTENNA CONNECTOR DUMMY CONNECTORS DTRX BOARD DUPLEXER
Figure 5-6 Location of the duplexer and combiner/isolator modules on Horizonmicro2
Tech. 512
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Duplexer and combiner/ isolator diagrams

Figure 5-7 shows the duplexer and combiner/isolator modules.
COMBINER/ISOLATOR MODULE DUPLEXER
Figure 5-7 Duplexer and combiner/isolator modules
Internal Rx/Tx interconnections

Figure 5-8 shows the DTRX Rx/Tx interconnections in a dual carrier system.
Tx COMBINER/ ISOLATOR Tx MODULE Tx
CARRIER 0
Tx OUT
DTRX
Tx/Rx ANTENNA
COMBINED Tx
CARRIER 1
Tx OUT
Ae DUPLEXER
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx IN
Figure 5-8 Horizonmicro2 DTRX Rx/Tx interconnections diagram

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 513
Horizoncompact2 isolators
GSM-209-323
Overview of the isolators
The isolators are high performance single stage directional Tx power modules, used in the Horizoncompact2. Due to its electromagnetic properties, it enables a low loss forward path through to the Horizoncompact2 booster Tx port and isolates in the reverse path. This module provides isolation of multiple frequencies in the GSM900 and DCS1800 BTS to reduce intermodulation distortion. The isolator reduces reverse intermodulation by absorbing the power of an interferer into its internal load. This module also prevents possible damage to the RF power amplifier resulting from load mismatches.
Location of the isolators

Figure 5-9 shows the location of the isolators and DTRX board on the Horizoncompact2.
NTYPE CONNECTOR
NTYPE CONNECTORS
ISOLATOR MODULES
DTRX BOARD
Figure 5-9 Isolator locations on the Horizoncompact2
Tech. 514
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Isolator module view

Figure 5-10 shows the external view of the Horizoncompact2 isolator module.
Figure 5-10 Horizoncompact2 isolator module
Internal Rx/Tx interconnections

Figure 5-11 shows the DTRX Rx/Tx interconnections in a dual carrier system.
Tx1/Rx ANTENNA
ANT Tx2 ANTENNA
Tx
AMP
Tx1
Tx1 ISOLATOR MODULE
Tx1 OUT
DUPLEXER Rx
DTRX
ANT FILTER
Tx
AMP
Tx2
Tx2 ISOLATOR MODULE
Tx2 OUT
Rx IN BOOSTER BTS
Figure 5-11 Horizoncompact2 DTRX Rx/Tx interconnections diagram

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 515
Booster
GSM-209-323
Booster
Overview of the booster
The Horizoncompact2 booster consists of two transmitter power amplifiers:
S S
When used with the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 BTS, boosts a 1.2 W (+30.8 dBm) per carrier output to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier. When used with the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 BTS, boosts a 2 W (+33.0 dBm) per carrier output to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier.
The booster is intended to be mounted close to the Horizoncompact2 BTS and connected through three two metre RF cables. The booster can be wall or pole mounted. Figure 5-12 shows a Horizoncompact2 with booster connected.
RF CABLE TO ANTENNA 1 RF CABLE TO ANTENNA 2 Horizoncompact2 BOOSTER
RF CABLING
Horizoncompact2 BTS
RS232 ALARM LINK
ig .0 6 0 .rh
Figure 5-12 Horizoncompact2 with booster unit

Tech. 516
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Booster
Booster system description

The Horizoncompact2 booster amplifies two independent RF carriers in the frequency range of 925 to 960 MHz (GSM900) or 1805 to 1880 MHz (DCS1800). Each Tx input to the booster is a pulsed RF carrier. One of these Tx carriers could be used in frequency hopping mode. When the downlink power control is employed in the associated Horizoncompact2, the peak amplitude of the pulsed RF carrier at the booster inputs can vary from +5 dBm to +30.8 dBm (GSM900) and from +2.5 dBm to +34.5 dBm (DCS1800). The Horizoncompact2 booster gain remains constant when the RF input is reduced, so the booster RF output power is correspondingly reduced. The attenuation through the receive (ANT1 only) is less than 1.0 dB.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 517
Booster
GSM-209-323
Functional description of booster

Referencing Figure 5-13, pulsed signals originating from Tx1 and Tx2 are carried through relays under normal operation. In the event of a failure in either or both power amplifiers, a bypass mode is automatically enabled by the booster once failure is detected. This feature enables switching a maximum of +41.25 dBm (GSM900) and +43 dBm (DCS1800) when RF power is applied to the relay. One amplifier can remain operational whilst the other is in bypass mode. Both carriers remain operational in bypass mode. From the switch, the pulsed signal arrives at the attenuator and local heat sink. The attenuator reduces a nominal 30.8 dBm by 2 dB to 28.8 dBm. The pulsed signals are then passed to the linear power amplifiers (PAs) where they are boosted to 42 dBm (+/1.25 dBm). A voltage of 28 V dc (GSM900) or 26 V dc (DCS1800) is derived from the power supply to drive the power amplifiers. From the PAs, the pulsed signals are passed to the isolator. The isolator is a directional power device which, due to its electromagnetic properties, enables a low loss forward path (0.3 dB) through to the next relay. The isolator prevents reverse intermodulation by absorbing the power of an interferer into its internal load so that it does not reach the power amplifier. The pulsed signal is then passed through the second relay and on to the Tx filter or duplexer. From the filter or duplexer, the signal is routed to the antennas. Modulated Rx signals arrive at antenna 1 and pass through the duplexer before passing to the Rx port.
RELAY ATTENUATOR LINEAR PA ISOLATOR RELAY TX FILTER ANT2
TX2
BYPASS PATH AC SUPPLY
+ 28 V dc (GSM900) OR + 26 V dc (DCS1800)
AC/DC SUPPLY ALARMS AND ALARMS BOARD + 28 V dc (GSM900) OR + 26 V dc (DCS1800) RELAY TX1 ATTENUATOR LINEAR PA RELAY DUPLEXER ANT1
BYPASS PATH RX
ISOLATOR
Figure 5-13 Booster functional block diagram

Tech. 518
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Booster
Bypass mode
In case of failure of either or both PAs inside the booster, there is an ability to bypass the amplifier which has failed. Bypass mode is automatically enabled by the booster once the fault is detected. This feature requires that the booster internal RF relays are capable of switching a maximum of +41.25 dBm (GSM900) or +43 dBm (DCS1800) whilst the RF power is applied to the relay. Both carriers of the Horizoncompact2 remain operational in bypass mode. If there is an ac failure both relays bypass the amplifiers. Overtemperature protection is required such that it is not latching and has sufficient range to prevent rapid cycling of ON and OFF. There is no overtemperature signal passed to the Horizoncompact2 BTS. Figure 5-14 shows a block diagram of the bypass feature.
ATTENUATOR LINEAR PA ISOLATOR TX2 INPUT RELAY RELAY TX FILTER ANT 2
BYPASS PATH
Figure 5-14 Bypass feature
Booster power supply module

The booster power supply module (BPSM) is mounted within the booster itself. It is an ac to ac switch mode supply with standard universal voltage input capability (88 V to 264 V, 45 to 66 Hz). Two dc voltage outputs are provided (12 V and 28 V dc (GSM900) or 26 V dc (DCS1800)) to a maximum total output of 150 W (GSM900) or 175 W (DCS1800).

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 519
Booster
GSM-209-323
Alarms
The alarm board monitors the discrete outputs from both power amplifiers (PAs), PA1, PA2 and the ac to dc converter. When either or both PAs fail or the ac to dc converter fails, a signal is reported to the Horizoncompact2 via a RS-232C interface. The line driver voltage levels are +/12 V maximum. An encoded RS232 status signal is sent to the Horizoncompact2 BTS every minute. Within the signal are fault indicators. After receiving five interrupts, the Horizoncompact2 BTS interrogates this signal to determine whether the booster is operational. No indicator is transmitted to the OMC-R if the Horizoncompact2 booster is operating correctly. Only fault conditions are flagged. If an error has occurred, then the type and nature of the error is reported to the OMC-R. If the dc to dc converter fails within the booster, there is a loss of power to the alarm board and, in the absence of battery backup, no messages are transmitted to the BTS. The transmissions from the Horizoncompact2 booster contain unique identification codes of the nature of failure, with expansion capability to detect a further four sub-failure modes. Figure 5-15 shows a functional diagram of the alarm interface . A description of the alarm codes sent to the BTS (should a functionality failure occur at power up or during normal operation) is provided in Table 5-1. Table 5-1 Alarm codes Alarm No Alarm PA1 Fail PA2 Fail PA1 and PA2 Fail All clear indication Power amplifier 1 transistor failed Power amplifier 2 transistor failed Both power amplifiers transistors failed Description
Tech. 520
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Booster
Alarm interface functional diagram

Figure 5-15 outlines the alarm board monitoring of the power amplifiers.
PA 1 POWER AMPLIFIERS
PA 2
PA = POWER AMPLIFIER
ALARM BOARD SIGNAL COND.
MICROCONTROLLER 87C51 RS232 I/F TX
POWER UP RESET
Figure 5-15 Alarm board monitoring

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 521
Booster
GSM-209-323
Tech. 522
20th Sep 02
Chapter 6
Heat management

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Heat management of the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Overview of BTS heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Module heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 62 Enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 63 Overview of enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 63 Diagram of finned heatsinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 63 Airflow within the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 64 Enclosure cooling overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 64 Airflow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 64 Booster heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 65 Overview of booster enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 65

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
iii
GSM-209-323
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Heat management of the BTS

Overview of BTS heat management
Heat management of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS is described under the topics Equipment heating and Equipment cooling.
Equipment heating
The RDIS and DTRX modules must be above a minimum temperature of 0 _C before the output of the ac-dc PSM is enabled and the various voltages are distributed through the BTS (see PSU description for details of voltage distribution). If the equipment is below the minimum temperature when switched on, heating is applied through heater mats until the minimum temperature is reached.
Enclosure cooling
Natural convection removes the generated heat. Cooling is by ambient airflow through the enclosure and across the finned heatsinks of the electronic and power supply modules. CAUTION Do not block the vents of the enclosure. Do not expose the BTS to prolonged sunlight without the solar cover in place. Do not expose the BTS to high temperatures created by output vents from other equipment.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 61
GSM-209-323
Module heaters
To ensure the correct operation of the RDIS and DTRX modules, two heater mats are attached to the heatsink of each module. These heater mats are used in extreme cold operating environments to bring the modules quickly to the specified working temperature. Each heater mat has two elements configured for either 110 V ac or 230 V ac. The ac-dc PSM selects the appropriate element, depending on the ac input. All heater mats are fused via a current fuse next to the ac input of the ac-dc PSM. These fuses cannot be replaced on site as this would invalidate the warranty; the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 must be returned to Motorola for repair. Each mat also has a built-in overtemperature thermal fuse. If this fuse blows, the mat must be replaced by returning the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 to Motorola for repair.
Heater block diagram

Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the heater circuit.
EMC FILTER WITH FUSE AC-DC PSM SELECTING EITHER 110 V OR 230 V HEATERS
AC INPUT
HEATER MATS RDIS
HEATER MATS DTRX
Figure 6-1 Heater block diagram
Tech. 62
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Enclosure cooling
Enclosure cooling
Overview of enclosure cooling
The modules have finned heatsinks, which remove heat in the temperature range of up to 50 C by natural convection.
Diagram of finned heatsinks

Figure 6-2 shows the finned heatsinks.
Figure 6-2 BTS finned heatsinks

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 63
Airflow within the enclosure
GSM-209-323
Airflow within the enclosure

Enclosure cooling overview
Enclosure cooling is by natural convection only. The ambient cooling airflow is channelled through the base of the enclosure, across the front of each of the electronic and power supply modules, and vented through the top of the enclosure.
Airflow diagram
Figure 6-3 shows the ambient cooling airflow through the enclosure.
AIRFLOW 300 MM MINIMUM DISTANCE TO OBSTACLE
BUILDING WALL POWER SUPPLY MODULE
SOLAR COVER (ESSENTIAL FOR PROTECTION AGAINST SOLAR HEATING)
WALL BRACKET
RDIS MODULE
DTRX MODULE
BATTERY BOTTOM ENTRY FOR AIRFLOW
500 MM MINIMUM DISTANCE TO OBSTACLE
Figure 6-3 Enclosure airflow

Tech. 64
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Booster heat management

Overview of booster enclosure cooling
The heat management of the Horizoncompact2 booster relies on natural convection of the generated heat. Cooling is by ambient airflow across the finned heatsink. CAUTION Do not block the vents of the enclosure. Do not expose the booster to prolonged sunlight without the solar cover in place. Do not expose the booster to excess temperature created by output vents from other equipment.
Enclosure cooling
The rear of the booster enclosure has a finned heatsink. It is used to remove heat in the temperature range of up to 50 C by natural convection.
Diagram of Horizoncompact2 booster heatsinks

Figure 6-4 illustrates the GSM900 and DCS1800 booster heatsinks.
DCS1800 VERSION
GSM900 VERSION
Figure 6-4 Horizoncompact2 booster heatsinks

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 65
GSM-209-323
Tech. 66
20th Sep 02
Chapter 7
Expansion feature

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
GSM-209-323
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323

i
71 71 72 72 72 73 73 74 74

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
iii
GSM-209-323
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Expansion feature
Expansion feature
Expansion feature overview
The Expansion feature allows two or three BTSs to be connected together to effectively form a four or six carrier site. When the expansion feature is used, the two or three Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS units in the expanded system are interconnected by fibre optic cables. One BTS in the configuration acts as a master and the attached units act as slaves. In an expanded system only the master BTS is connected to the network, by an E1/HDSL interface; the slaves are not. Each slave unit requires one fibre optic cable to be connected to the master, serving for downlink and uplink data. The slave BTS also receives synchronization signals on the downlink. Figure 7-1 show a fully expanded Horizonmicro2 system.
MASTER BTS
FIBRE OPTIC LINKS
SLAVE BTS
SLAVE BTS
ig.055.rh
Figure 7-1 Horizonmicro2 BTS expansion feature

20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 71
Expansion feature
GSM-209-323
Dual band support

There are two variants of Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2, one for operating at GSM900 frequencies and one for operating at DCS1800 frequencies. The frequency is hardware specific and cannot be changed by software. However, although a single BTS operates only at the frequency it is designed for, an expanded system using GSR5 (or later) software can have a mix of the two frequency variants. An expanded site can therefore support both GSM900 and DCS1800 frequencies.
Field replaceable units

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs are single field replaceable units (FRUs), and as such, no options exist to upgrade the units in the field. The configuration options of the product are:
S S
E1/HDSL network connection. The number of HDSL modems is 0/1/2. Integrated antenna for Horizonmicro2.
Configuration data
Hardware configuration information must be determined at the OMC-R in order to facilitate the dispatching of field technicians with the proper source equipment. The additional configuration information required is:
S
Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS cabinet type.
The following Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS site configuration is also required to describe the hardware configuration. This data can be obtained from the BSS/MIB database or is detectable from the hardware.
S S S S
GSM900 or DCS1800. HDSL to E1 NIU. CSFP (PCMCIA card for alternative load storage). Integrated antenna equipped.
Tech. 72
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-323
Expansion feature
Single band BTS configurations

Carriers in a single BTS are always configured in the same cell and the same frequency type. The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 supports the following site configurations using single band cells: NOTE The combination of Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 cannot be used at the same frequency.
Single BTS site

S
Omni site - up to 2 carriers in a single cell.
Two BTS site

S S
Omni site - up to 4 carriers in a single cell. Two sector site, 2 carriers per sector.
Three BTS site

S S S
Omni site - up to 6 carriers in a single cell. Two sector site, 2/4 carriers per sector. Three sector site, 2 carriers per sector. NOTE Motorola does not recommend using the Horizonmicro2 in an omni 6 site configuration unless the cell radius is small (in-building coverage required, for example). This is due to the very low Tx output power generated if six carriers are combined. Motorola recommends one antenna per site for Horizonmicro2 and two antennas per site for Horizoncompact2.
Dual band BTS configurations

When dual band cells are configured, the following cell configurations are supported:
Two BTS site

S
One BTS with up to two GSM900 carriers and one BTS with up to two DCS1800 carriers.
Three BTS site

S S
One BTS with up to two GSM 900 carriers and two BTSs with up to a total of four DCS1800 carriers. Two BTSs with up to a total of four GSM900 carriers and one BTS with up to two DCS1800 carriers.
20th Sep 02
68P02902W62-O
Tech. 73
Expansion feature
GSM-209-323
Antenna options
The Horizonmicro2 has an optional internal antenna and can also use an external antenna. The Horizoncompact2 is connected to a booster which in turn is connected to two external antennas.
Software requirement
Software release GSR5 or later is required for the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 expansion feature to be available. GSR5 software is needed in both master and slave BTSs of an expanded system to enable the master/slave relationships to be established. Software release GSR4 allows the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 to function only as single BTS systems without expansion capabilities. If GSR4 software is used on an expanded system, only the BTS with the E1/HDSL connection will function.
Tech. 74
20th Sep 02
CHAPTER 1 SITE PREPARATION
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CHAPTER 3 BTS EXPANSION
CHAPTER 4 COMMISSIONING
CHAPTER 5 DECOMMISSIONING
Category 423
Installation & Configuration (Inst.)
Installation & Configuration: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
ii
Installation & Configuration: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W63-O
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Category 423 Installation & Configuration (Inst.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i i
Installation procedure overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Installation procedure list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Weight of delivered package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 12 Introduction to tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 12 Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 13 Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space requirements diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site visit safety and weather protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions and maintenance cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 14 14 14 14 14 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 18 18 18 19
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 E1 link transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation kit delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation kit equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the BTS installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposing of the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster installation kit delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation kit equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposing of the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
111 111 111 113 113 113 115 115 115 116 116 116 119 119 119 120 120 120
68P02902W63-O
iii
GSM-209-423
Example layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 122 Mounting the BTS wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling holes for the mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the booster wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling holes for the mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cabling thermal properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing BTS enclosure power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing BTS power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the power and E1/HDSL cable conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the site main earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing booster power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to booster power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth connection point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the supplementary earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 137 137 137 138 138 139 141 144 144 144 145 145 146 148 151 151 151 151 152 153 153 153 153 154 155 155 156 158 159 160 160 160 160 161 162 162 163 165 166
External antenna cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 External antenna cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 RF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/HDSL link connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology for Tx and Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168 168 168 169
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Installing E1/HDSL link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing E1/HDSL link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routeing the E1/HDSL link to the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 cabling distance/loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
170 170 170 170 170 171

i
21 21 21 21 22 23
BTS equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 24 Chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 24 Unpacking the chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 25 25 25 25
Booster equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 26 Chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 26 Unpacking the booster equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the BTS chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installation of the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis installation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting external cables to the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting earth straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Horizonmicro2 antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional internal antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
27 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 210 211 212 212 212 213 214 216 217 218 219 222 222 222 223
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
Battery/cover installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the battery and cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the booster chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing booster chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting external cables to the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to connecting booster external cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting earth straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary earth connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Rx, Tx and antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the alarms cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the security bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
224 224 225 225 225 226 227 228 229 229 229 230 231 232 235 236 237 237 240 240 240 241

i
31 31 31 31 32 32 35 35 35 36 37 38 38 39 310 311
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the system visually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 41 41 42 42 42 43
vi
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Powering up the BTS and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for powering up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 44 45 47 48
Overview of decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Decommissioning the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decommissioning a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 52 52 52 53 56 57 57 57 57 510

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
vii
GSM-209-423
viii
20th Sep 02
Chapter 1
Site preparation

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Chapter 1 Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation procedure overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Installation procedure list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Weight of delivered package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 12 Introduction to tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 12 Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 13 Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space requirements diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site visit safety and weather protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions and maintenance cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 14 14 14 14 14 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 18 18 18 19
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 E1 link transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 110 Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 111 Introduction to earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 111 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 111 Installation kit delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 113 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 113 Installation kit equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 113 Unpacking the BTS installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 115 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 115 Disposing of the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 115 Booster installation kit delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 116 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 116 Installation kit equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 116 Unpacking the installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 119 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 119 Disposing of the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 119 Mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 120 Introduction to mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 120 Mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 120
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
iii
GSM-209-423
Example layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 122 Mounting the BTS wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling holes for the mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the booster wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling holes for the mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cabling thermal properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing BTS enclosure power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing BTS power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the power and E1/HDSL cable conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the site main earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing booster power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to booster power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth connection point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the supplementary earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 137 137 137 138 138 139 141 144 144 144 145 145 146 148 151 151 151 151 152 153 153 153 153 154 155 155 156 158 159 160 160 160 160 161 162 162 163 165 166
External antenna cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 External antenna cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 RF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 167 E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/HDSL link connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology for Tx and Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168 168 168 169
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Installing E1/HDSL link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing E1/HDSL link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routeing the E1/HDSL link to the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 cabling distance/loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170 170 170 170 170 171

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
vi
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
vii
GSM-209-423
Installation procedure overview
Installation procedure overview

Installation procedure list
This chapter contains information that should be read before beginning the actual installation. Prior to the physical installation of a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure, there is a requirement to perform the procedures listed in Table 1-1. Table 1-1 Horizonmicro2 / Horizoncompact2 pre-installation procedures Procedure Site visit Description Describes the sequence of events and procedures to be performed at the site before actual installation. Contains details of physical site requirements. Describes site earth requirements. Describes how to unpack the installation kit. Describes the procedure to be used for mounting the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS and Horizoncompact booster wall mounting bracket. Describes the procedures to be used for power and earth cabling installation. Details the procedures to be used for Rx, Tx and antenna cable installation. Describes the procedures to be used for E1 link cable installation.
Preparing the site Earthing the site Unpacking the installation kit Mounting the wall bracket
Installing the power and earth cabling Installing the Rx, Tx, antenna cabling Installing the E1 link cabling NOTE
Those parts of the installation kit that are required after fitment of the BTS and booster wall brackets will need to be stored safely and securely.
Weight of delivered package

WARNING The equipment and packaging weighs approximately 40 kg in total. Care must be taken in handling and lifting, and requires two persons.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 11
Tools and materials
GSM-209-423
Tools and materials

Introduction to tools and materials
The following tables list the recommended tools and materials for carrying out the procedures in this manual. A recommended Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tool kit is listed in Table 1-2. Table 1-2 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tool kit Quantity
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description 13 mm combination spanner. Screwdriver set: flats and posidrive. 1/4 inch square drive. 1/4 inch extension. 1/4 inch to hex adapter. T10 bit. T25 tamperproof bit (supplied). T30 tamperproof bit (supplied). 6 mm hex bit. Hammer drill plus masonry bits. Roll insulation tape. Spirit level. Ratchet & sockets. Torque wrench. Ruler. Hammer. Pole mount banding tool (order number SWLN4847). Wire stripping tool. Crimping tool. Small hacksaw.
Inst. 12
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Tools and materials
Torque values
The torque values that are to be used when installing Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment are listed in Table 1-3. Table 1-3 Wall bracket torque values (BTS and booster) Part Chassis/wall bracket earth stud (BTS) Chassis/wall bracket earth stud (booster) (Horizoncompact2 only) Wall bracket/wall fixings BTS conduit bracket Booster conduit bracket (Horizoncompact2 only) Size/Type M8 nut M8 nut Torque 10 Nm 10 Nm Where Factory & field Factory & field
Customer selection M6 skt hd M8 skt hd 3.4 Nm 10 Nm
Field only Factory & field Factory & field

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 13
Site requirements and considerations
GSM-209-423

Introduction
The base site area where the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 is to be installed must meet the structural and environmental criteria provided in this section. Other relevant installation and operational requirements for the equipment, such as weights, dimensions and power requirements are also provided here. NOTE The Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 is mounted on a wall, or similar flat surface, using a wall bracket. It may also be pole mounted using the same wall bracket and the pole securing brackets and straps.
Environmental requirements
The environmental limits for equipment operation are defined in Table 1-4. Table 1-4 Environmental limits Environment Operating Storage (packaged) Temperature 33 _C to +50 _C 33 _C to +70 _C Relative humidity 5% to 100% 8% to 100%
Dimensions
Table 1-5 lists the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment dimensions. Table 1-5 Equipment dimensions (mm) Equipment BTS Booster Height 532 347 Width 542 541 Depth, including wall bracket 201 226
Weights
Table 1-6 lists the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment weights. Table 1-6 Equipment weights (kg) Equipment BTS Booster GSM900 Booster DCS1800 Weight, excluding wall bracket, solar cover or battery 21 15 19 Weight, including wall bracket, solar cover and battery 28 20 24
Inst. 14
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Power specifications
Power supply requirements
Table 1-7 lists the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment power requirements. Table 1-7 BTS power requirements Equipment BTS Booster Supply voltage range 88 V to 264 V ac (45 66 Hz) (4566 Maximum supply current range 7.8 A to 2.6 A (depending on supply voltage) 2.3 A
Battery backup
Table 1-8 shows the specifications for the battery used in the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs. Table 1-8 Battery specifications Voltage 22 V dc Capacity 2.5 Ah Backup duration > 5 minutes
Power consumption
Table 1-9 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment power consumption figures. Table 1-9 BTS power consumption (W) Equipment BTS (heater on) BTS (heater off) Booster GSM900 Booster DCS1800 NOTE Ambient temperature 40 C to 10 C 10 C to 50 C Maximum power consumption 688 188 169 199 Typical power consumption 658 138 144 170
The maximum power consumption figures apply to extreme operating conditions (such as minimum operating ambient temperature, heaters on, maximum RF output power, charging batteries and lowest module efficiencies). Typical power consumption is for the equipment running at full RF output power, trickle battery charge and nominal module efficiencies.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 15
GSM-209-423
Software release GSR4 limits the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 to function only as single BTS systems without expansion capabilities. Software release GSR5 or later is required to support the expansion feature for the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. The GSR5 software is needed in both master and slave BTSs to enable the master/slave relationship. If GSR4 software is used on an expanded system, only the BTS with the E1/HDSL connection will be functional.
HDSL modems
Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.
Structural requirements
To adequately support the weight of the fully equipped Horizoncompact2 including wall bracket, the designated mounting surface must be capable of bearing a maximum load of:
S S S
28 kg for the GSM900 or DCS1800 Horizonmicro2, or 48 kg for the GSM900 Horizoncompact2 (28 kg) with booster (20 kg), or 52 kg for the DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 (28 kg) with booster (24 kg).
See the section entitled Mounting guidelines for details of the various categories of mounting surface materials. WARNING In order to preserve safety, local specialist assistance should be sought for more specific mounting recommendations, since detailed information on the subject is beyond the scope of this manual.
Space requirements
Use the wall brackets as templates. Clearance of 300 mm above, 500 mm below, 10 mm each side and 1000 mm in front of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS and booster (only used with the Horizoncompact2) is required to allow for installation and maintenance. 100 mm of space to the right side is required if the carrying/lifting handles are fitted and used. 500 mm of space to the left side is needed for clearance for the expansion feature.
Inst. 16
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Space requirements diagram

Figure 1-1 shows the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 clearances.
300 mm CLEARANCE
100 mm CLEARANCE
* 100 mm CLEARANCE
* CLEARANCE FOR USE OF HANDLES
300 mm CLEARANCE
100 mm CLEARANCE *
* 100 mm CLEARANCE
Horizonmicro2 OR Horizoncompact2 BTS
500 mm CLEARANCE
Figure 1-1 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 clearances

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 17
Site visit safety and weather protection
GSM-209-423

Introduction to site safety
When preparing to do work at a site and upon arrival, follow the instructions provided in this section.
Rubbish on site
Clear rubbish from the site on completion of the job, unless otherwise indicated by the customer. WARNING Do not burn rubbish as packaging might give off toxic gases.
On site safety
Responsibilities of senior team member
The senior member of the team must:
S
Advise all new staff on site of safety requirements before any work takes place.
Responsibilities of all personnel

All personnel must:
S
Wear supplied safety helmets when antenna or overhead work is in progress, and when local regulations require them. Wear supplied safety goggles and dust masks when drilling, this is particularly important when drilling overhead ironwork. Wear supplied ear protectors while drilling is in progress. Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment. Observe safety recommendations when lifting equipment. Wear a safety harness and line with a shock absorber anchored to a suitable point, and observe all safety regulations when working at height.
S S S S
Stop any work that is being supervised if any person in the team is not properly protected. When installing cable ties, even temporarily, cut the excess or tail properly. This is to prevent sharp edges inflicting injury when not cut flush with the locking edge.
Inst. 18
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Weather conditions and maintenance cover

WARNING Due consideration should be given to the hazards of wind and other inclement weather conditions when installing the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. This is especially important when using a ladder to gain access. Use discretion at all times. Do not climb a ladder, scaffolding or other method of access if you feel unsafe to do so under these weather conditions.
Motorola recommends that a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 is not installed during inclement weather conditions. If this cannot be avoided, some form of maintenance cover should be used. NOTE A maintenance cover is not supplied with the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS or Horizoncompact2 booster equipment and should be provided by the customer if required.
Installation and configuration of a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure and booster unit is dependent on the weather conditions. There are three situations where the recommended guidelines should be considered before commencing work:
S S S
No access. Access with maintenance cover. Access without maintenance cover.
No access
Access should not be attempted to an enclosure during the following actual or imminent inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance cover:
S S S
Strong winds. Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet. During an electrical storm.
Access with maintenance cover

Access may be made to an enclosure under the following conditions with the use of the maintenance cover:
S S
Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet. Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause a problem.
Access without maintenance cover

Access may be made under the following conditions without the use of the maintenance cover:
S S
No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period. When the temperature is between 40 _C to +50 _C.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 19
Earthing and transient protection
GSM-209-423
Earthing and transient protection

Site earthing
This section summarises general procedures for earthing the site. Refer to the Grounding guidelines for cellular radio installations (68P81150E62) . Use national regulations or refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671 (IEC364).
S S
The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth point as its power source). A supplementary earth protection terminal (stud) is located on the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS wall bracket. It is provided for additional protection in exposed environments. This wall bracket earth is connected to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 earth protection stud on the chassis by a short attached cable (see Figure 1-2) once the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis is installed. A supplementary earth protection terminal (stud) is located on the Horizoncompact2 booster wall bracket. It is provided for additional protection in exposed environments. This wall bracket earth is connected to the Horizoncompact2 booster earth protection stud on the chassis by a short attached cable (see Figure 1-3) once the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis is installed. Provision should be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and making a connection to the wall bracket earthing stud before beginning the installation of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis. Refer to the site-specific building documentation for detailed site earthing information.
E1 link transient and lightning protection

E1 links connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protection as part of the 75 ohm E1 line termination (RHINO) or 120 ohm E1 line termination (DINO). Surge arresters should be utilized to provide additional protection when exposure to high voltages is likely (for example when equipment is installed in open environments). For in-building sites, ensure any external connection to the site is fed through standard coaxial electromagnetic protection (EMP) devices. EMP devices are customer/country dependent and Motorola cannot recommend a specific type.
Inst. 110
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Earthing the site
Earthing the site

Introduction to earthing the site
The following covers the earthing procedure for a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 site. NOTE The term earth in this manual equates to the term ground used in some associated documentation.
Requirements
Figure 1-2 shows the earthing requirements for a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 site.
Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS

Each site external earth must be assessed on an individual site basis and in compliance to regional electric company (REC) requirements or national requirements (conditions will vary considerably depending on local soil conditions and site topography). This may involve a site survey, soil resistance test, and earth fault loop impedance measurement before installation. Use national regulations or refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671 (IEC364).
MAIN BUILDING EARTH WALL MOUNTING BRACKET SUPPLEMENTARY EARTH CABLE
EARTH CABLE (AT BOTTOM OF BRACKET)
BTS CHASSIS SAFETY EARTH EARTHED THROUGH AC SOURCE SUPPLY
AC/DC PSU
WALL BRACKET EARTH CABLE AWAITING CONNECTION TO CHASSIS
Figure 1-2 Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 earthing requirements

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 111
Earthing the site
GSM-209-423
Figure 1-3 shows the earth connection points for the booster wall bracket and chassis. This installation may involve a site survey, soil resistance test and earth fault loop impedance measurement before installation. Use national regulations or refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671 (IEC364).
MAIN BUILDING EARTH WALL MOUNTING BRACKET SUPPLEMENTARY EARTH CABLE
EARTH CABLE (AT BOTTOM OF BRACKET)
BOOSTER CHASSIS SAFETY EARTH EARTHED THROUGH AC SOURCE SUPPLY
AC/DC PSU
Figure 1-3 Horizoncompact2 booster earthing requirements (GSM900 wall bracket shown)
Inst. 112
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Installation kit delivery and packaging

Equipment delivery
The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company, along with the necessary moving pallets and padding. Use the pallets and padding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.
Installation kit equipment

The installation kit comprises all the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment and is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The contents are listed below and the packaging is shown in Figure 1-4. The installation kit comprises:
S
Carton A, which contains the following: Wall mounting bracket. Pole/Wall mounting kit comprising: 1 medium channel, long. 1 medium channel, short. 2 universal channel clamps. 3 bucklestraps, 1120 mm long (1 spare). 8 screws, 8 washers (two spare). 1 cable tie. 1 mounting bracket. 1 conduit bracket.
Earth strap (wall mounting bracket to chassis) (attached to mounting bracket). Conduit termination bracket and fittings.
S
Carton B, which contains the following: Solar cover (front). Battery and battery cover. Customer interface kit including: T25 tamperproof Torx bit (for solar cover). T30 tamperproof Torx bit (for pole mount).
Carton C, which contains the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 113
GSM-209-423
CARTON A contents:
WALL MOUNTING KIT POLE MOUNT FITTINGS CONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET AND FITTINGS
CARTON B contents:
SOLAR COVER CUSTOMER INTERFACE KIT BATTERY AND BATTERY COVER INTERNAL ANTENNA (OPTIONAL)
CARTON A
CARTON B
CARTON C:
Horizonmicro2 UNIT OR Horizoncompact2 UNIT (see CAUTION below)
CARTON C
Tools required: see Table 1-2
Inspect box contents for transit damage. Ensure items are handled carefully to avoid damage.
WARNING
This equipment and packaging weighs approximately 40 kg in total. Care must be taken in handling and lifting, and will require two persons. To prevent the possibility of condensation build up, do not open carton C until the equipment is to be commissioned.
CAUTION
Figure 1-4 Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 installation kit
Inst. 114
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Unpacking the BTS installation kit
Unpacking the BTS installation kit

Introduction
WARNING The assembled Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 installation kit weighs approximately 28 kg (Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2, wall bracket and conduit). Observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying. Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched or damaged in any way during this procedure.
CAUTION
Remove cartons A, B and C from the container, as shown in Figure 1-4. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any damage to the transport company.
Disposing of the packing material

To dispose of the packing material: 1. 2. Put the three cartons back in the shipping container. Dispose of the shipping container as advised by the in-country project manager. NOTE The packaging is recycleable cardboard. It is NOT to be returned to the factory. Should the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 need to be returned to the factory at any time in the future, contact the Motorola local office who will advise on correct packaging. Do not return the battery pack with the BTS. Under no circumstances should BTSs be packaged with the battery pack attached because if the battery pack is damaged, the loose battery cells will present a potential safety hazard.
WARNING

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 115
Booster installation kit delivery and packaging
GSM-209-423

Equipment delivery
The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company, along with the necessary moving pallets and padding. Use the pallets and padding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.
Installation kit equipment

The installation kit comprises all the Horizoncompact2 booster equipment and is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The contents are listed below and the packaging is shown in Figure 1-5. The installation kit comprises:
S
Carton A, which contains the following; Wall mounting bracket. Earth strap (wall mounting bracket to chassis attached to mounting bracket). Medium channel extension (x 2). Universal clamp (x 2). Buckle strap (x 3) 1120 mm long (1 spare). Pan head screw (x 8), tamperproof torque M6 x 16 (2 spare). Plain washer (x 8), (2 spare). Conduit bracket. M8 x 20 socket head screws (x 2), fitted to conduit bracket. Cable tie.
Pole mounting kit, comprising:
Inst. 116
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Carton B, which contains the following: Solar cover. M5 x 20 tamperproof screws (x 2) attached to the lower cover brackets. Blank badge (fitted to cover). RF cable (2 m), Horizoncompact2 BTS Tx1 to booster. RF cable (2 m), Horizoncompact2 BTS Tx2 to booster. RF cable (2 m), Horizoncompact2 BTS Rx to booster. Antenna cables (x 2), 400 mm. Alarm cable, 2.5 m. M8 x 20 socket head screws (x 4), (2 for security plate, 2 spare). M8 plain washers (x 2), (1 spare). Horizoncompact2 booster. Horizoncompact2 booster handles. M8 x 20 socket head screws (x 4) fitted to handles*. M8 plain washers (x 4) fitted to handles*. Cable strain relief clamp (attached to lower chassis flange). M8 x 20 socket head screws (x 2) fitted to back plate of chassis (for securing security plate). * These screws and washers are to be used to secure the Horizoncompact2 booster unit to the wall bracket once the handles have been removed.
Cable kit comprising:
Security bracket.
Carton C, which contains the following:
NOTE

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 117
GSM-209-423
CARTON A contents:
WALL MOUNTING KIT POLE MOUNT KIT CONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET AND FITTINGS
CARTON C:
Horizoncompact2 BOOSTER Horizoncompact2 HANDLES (see CAUTION below)
CARTON B contents:
SOLAR COVER CABLE KIT SECURITY BRACKET
Tools required: see Table 1-2 Inspect box contents for transit damage. Ensure items are handled carefully to avoid damage.
WARNING
This equipment and packaging weighs approximately 40 kg. Care must be taken in handling and lifting, and will require two persons. To prevent the possibility of condensation build up, do not open carton C until the equipment is to be commissioned.
CAUTION
Figure 1-5 Horizoncompact2 booster installation kit
Inst. 118
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Unpacking the installation kit
Unpacking the installation kit

Introduction
WARNING The assembled Horizoncompact2 booster installation kit weighs approximately 20 kg GSM900 and 24 kg DCS1800. Observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying. Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched or damaged in any way during this procedure.
CAUTION
Remove cartons A, B and C from the container, as shown in Figure 1-4. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any damage to the transport company.
Disposing of the packing material

To dispose of the packing material: 1. 2. Put the three cartons back in the shipping container. Dispose of the shipping container as advised by the in-country project manager. NOTE The packaging is recycleable cardboard. It is NOT to be returned to the factory. Should the Horizoncompact2 booster need to be returned to the factory at any time in the future, contact the Motorola local office who will advise on correct packaging.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 119
Mounting guidelines
GSM-209-423
Mounting guidelines
Introduction to mounting guidelines
This section provides general guidelines on mounting the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 (comprising BTS enclosure and booster). Local specialist assistance should be sought for more specific mounting recommendations, since detailed information on the subject is beyond the scope of this manual.
Mounting guidelines
Flatness of walls
The walls onto which the BTS enclosure is intended to be installed should have no variations in depth greater than 5 mm. This criteria applies over a width of 640 mm (120 mm either side of the fixing points) and a height of 340 mm (45 mm above and below the fixing points). The same measurements apply to the Horizoncompact2 booster, with the exception that the walls onto which the enclosure is intended to be installed should have no variations in depth greater than 2 mm. If the wall required does not meet this criteria, measures should be taken to reduce these variations, either by modifying the wall itself to produce a flat area or by some addition which creates a flat surface or set of points on the wall. Any changes can alter the wall characteristics and additions can add extra stresses. Advice should be sought on the best method of producing the flat surface required. The wall, plus additions, must be considered strong enough by survey to support the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure weight.
Inst. 120
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Mounting guidelines
Mounting surfaces
Table 1-10 shows fixing design and specifications for different types of mounting surface. Ideally, the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 should be fixed to a Group A (i) material. Table 1-10 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 fixing material specifications Group or category Group A (i) Group A (ii) Group A (iii) Group A general Group B (i)
Description of material Mounting guidelines
Concrete, brickwork, stonework, The uppermost fixings should have dense aggregate blockwork the weight of at least 600 mm of and reconstituted stone. solid construction above them. Lightweight, blockwork (solid), lightweight precast concrete units (solid). Hollow brickwork, hollow clay pots and tiles, hollow concrete units. The uppermost fixings should have the weight of at least 900 mm of solid construction above them. b th
The fixings should not penetrate more than 70 mm, or less than 50 mm. Construction should be of at least 100 mm thickness. 11 mm diameter clearance holes are provided in the wall brackets. Renders and mortars applied directly to backgrounds in Group A, with or without surface tiles and mosaics. Renders and mortars applied directly to backgrounds in Group A, with or without intermediate insulation. Where the surface materials are up to 50 mm thick, add 300 mm to the height of construction above the highest fixing specified for Group A. Where the standoff from the face of the background to the face of the cladding is between 50 mm and 100 mm, check first that vapour barriers or sealed cavities will not be damaged. Add 600 mm to the heights of construction above the highest fixing specified for Group A.
Group B (ii)
Group C
Composite lightweight cladding panels, metal cladding and sheeting over steel or timber framing.
Group D
Group E
In general, it is not recommended that the BTS is fixed to these claddings. Apart from the inherent weakness of these materials, penetration of such claddings can t ti f h l ddi Curtain walling and windows cause cold bridging, moisture with glass, metal, plastic or ingress and loss of insulating other lightweight sheet properties. Where these claddings materials, with or without have an external support frame insulation. capable of supporting the BTS, it Cavity construction of two may be possible to fix to it. The substantially independent specialist advice of the cladding leaves of construction, system manufacturer must be consisting of an inner leaf of sought if such a fixing is Group A materials and an outer contemplated. leaf of Group C or D materials.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 121
Example layouts
GSM-209-423
Example layouts
Refer to the following installation layout examples before proceeding with wall bracket or pole mounting procedures.
Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using a wall duct

Figure 1-6 shows Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL INTERNAL ANTENNA
RX/TX CABLE CONNECTOR
RX/TX CABLE EXTERNAL ANTENNA
NETWORK LINES
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-6 Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using a wall duct
Inst. 122
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Example layouts
Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using upper and lower wall ducts
Figure 1-7 shows a Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using upper and lower wall ducts. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
RX/TX CABLE (EXTERNAL ANTENNA) RX/TX CABLE CONNECTOR OPTIONAL INTERNAL ANTENNA
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR
NETWORK LINES
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-7 Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using upper and lower wall ducts

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 123
Example layouts
GSM-209-423
Horizonmicro2 pole mounting (back to back)

Figure 1-8 shows a Horizonmicro2 pole mount back to back installation. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
Horizonmicro2 Horizonmicro2
INTERNAL ANTENNA INTERNAL ANTENNA
NETWORK LINES
NETWORK LINES
AC SUPPLY CABLE AC SUPPLY CABLE
Figure 1-8 Horizonmicro2 example layout, pole mount back to back

Inst. 124
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Example layouts
GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster mounting using a wall duct

Figure 1-9 shows a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit installation using a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
Horizoncompact2
AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR
BOOSTER
ALARMS CONNECTOR
ALARMS CABLE AC POWER CABLE AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR
Horizoncompact2 BTS
NETWORK LINES
ALARMS CABLE
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-9 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster layout, using wall duct

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 125
Example layouts
GSM-209-423
GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster RF cabling using a wall duct

Figure 1-10 shows RF cabling for a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit using a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
ANT1 CABLE ANT2 CABLE
Horizoncompact2 BOOSTER
ANT1 CONNECTOR (N-type)
TX2 CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type) ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type) RX CONNECTOR (N-type) TX1 CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type)
WHITE
BLUE
RED
Horizoncompact2 BTS
RX CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type)
TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type)
TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type)
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-10 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit RF cabling using wall duct
Inst. 126
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Example layouts
GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster RF cabling using part of a wall duct

Figure 1-11 shows RF cabling for a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 using part of a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type) ANT1 CONNECTOR (N-type) TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type) ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type)
WHITE
RX CONNECTOR (N-type) 2 m CABLE BLUE RED
Horizoncompact2 BTS
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-11 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using part of wall duct

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 127
Example layouts
GSM-209-423
GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster power and alarm cabling using a wall duct
Figure 1-12 shows a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit power and alarm cabling using a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
ALARMS CONNECTOR
AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR AC POWER CABLE ALARMS CABLE
AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Horizoncompact2 BTS
NETWORK LINES AC SUPPLY CABLES ALARMS CABLE
Figure 1-12 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit power and alarm cabling using wall duct
Inst. 128
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Example layouts
GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster RF cabling using a wall duct

Figure 1-13 shows RF cabling for a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit using a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
ANT1 CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type) TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type)
TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type) ANT2 CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type) RX CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type)
WHITE
BLUE
RED
Horizoncompact2 BTS
RX CABLE CONNECTOR
(N-type)
TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type) TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type) DUCT (NOT PROVIDED) RX CABLE TX2 CABLE TX1 CABLE
Figure 1-13 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit RF cabling using wall duct
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 129
Example layouts
GSM-209-423
DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster power and alarm cabling using a wall duct
Figure 1-14 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 power and alarm cabling using a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
ALARMS CONNECTOR
AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR
AC SUPPLY CABLE ALARMS CABLE AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR
Horizoncompact2 BTS
NETWORK LINES
ALARMS CABLE UNDERSIDE VIEW
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-14 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 power and alarm cabling using wall duct
Inst. 130
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Example layouts
DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster RF cabling using a wall duct

Figure 1-15 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type) RX CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type)
ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type) ANT1 CONNECTOR (N-type) TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type) WHITE BLUE RED
Horizoncompact2 BTS
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-15 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using wall duct

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 131
Example layouts
GSM-209-423
DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster RF cabling using part of a wall duct

Figure 1-16 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using part of a wall duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type) ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type) ANT1 CONNECTOR (N-type) TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type) WHITE 2 m CABLE BLUE RED
Horizoncompact2 BTS
TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type) TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type)
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-16 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using part of wall duct

Inst. 132
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Example layouts
DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster power and alarm cabling using pole duct
Figure 1-17 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 power and alarm cabling using pole duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR
ALARMS CONNECTOR ALARMS CABLE AC SUPPLY CABLE
AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Horizoncompact2 BTS
NETWORK LINES AC SUPPLY CABLES ALARMS CABLE
Figure 1-17 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 power and alarm cabling using pole duct
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 133
Example layouts
GSM-209-423
DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster RF cabling using pole duct

Figure 1-18 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using pole duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
ANT1 CABLE
ANT2 CABLE
RX CONNECTOR (N-type) TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE N-type)
TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type) ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type) ANT1 CONNECTOR (N-type)
WHITE
BLUE
RED
Horizoncompact2 BTS
RX CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type) TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type) TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type) DUCT (NOT PROVIDED) RX CABLE TX2 CABLE TX1 CABLE
Figure 1-18 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using pole duct

Inst. 134
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Example layouts
DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster RF cabling without pole duct

Figure 1-19 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling without pole duct. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
RX CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type) TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N-type)
TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type) ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type)
ANT1 CONNECTOR (N-type)
RED WHITE BLUE
Horizoncompact2 BTS
TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N-type) DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)
Figure 1-19 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling without pole duct

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 135
Example layouts
GSM-209-423
Horizoncompact2 and booster back to back pole mounting

Figure 1-20 shows the power and RF cabling for Horizoncompact2 and booster when mounted back to back on a pole. WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with the safety issues described elsewhere in this manual.
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
Horizoncompact2 BTS
ALARMS CABLE
RF CABLES
ALARMS CABLE
AC SUPPLY CABLE
DUCT (NOT PROVIDED) RF CABLES AC SUPPLY CABLE
Figure 1-20 Power and RF cabling for Horizoncompact2 and booster when pole mounted back to back
Inst. 136
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Mounting the BTS wall bracket

Introduction to mounting the wall bracket
The Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure is wall mounted using a custom mounting bracket. This procedure provides information on mounting the wall bracket to the allocated position on the wall. It is necessary to mount the wall bracket before installing a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS or any associated cabling. CAUTION It is recommended that local assistance is sought to determine the correct type of fixing for the mounting site material. Refer to the Mounting guidelines section for material classification and fixing guidelines. Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using a torque wrench. The torque values should be chosen to suit the wall material and the total weight of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 installation.
Tools
Mounting the wall bracket on a wall
This procedure requires the following tools:
S S S S S S
Heavy duty hammer drill. Masonry drill bits, of suitable diameter, 150 mm deep (or as required). Roll of insulating tape (or similar). Spirit level. Ratchet with suitable diameter socket. Torque wrench.
Mounting the wall bracket on a pole

S S S S
Spirit level. Ruler. Pole mount banding tool. Hammer.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 137
GSM-209-423
Preparing the tools

Gather all required tools prior to ascending ladder or hydraulic lift cage. NOTE Use of a tool belt is recommended.
Drilling holes for the mounting bolts

To drill the holes for the mounting bolts: 1. 2. 3. Seek local advice on the depth to drill the holes in the wall, then place tape on the drills to the required drilling depth. Carefully position the wall bracket over the mounting point, in accordance with the site plan. Ensure the wall bracket is level using the spirit level. Use the wall bracket to mark the location of each of the three mounting holes (see Figure 1-22). WARNING CAUTION Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes. Drilling masonry and brickwork produces dust, which is harmful to equipment and wiring. Protect the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 and any nearby equipment from dust. Use a waterproof, cloth or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Clean up any accumulated debris from the installation area carefully before uncovering the equipment.
4. 5.
Drill the holes to the recommended depths. Insert the recommended wall fixings.
Inst. 138
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Wall mounting
To mount the wall bracket: 1. How are the cable inputs to be routed to the wall bracket: If ... By conduit No conduit 2. 3. Then ... Go to step 2 Go to step 4
Locate the conduit termination bracket and fixings from installation kit carton A. Referencing Figure 1-21, place the conduit bracket on the front face of the wall bracket and attach using the two M8 screws, plain and spring washers and nuts provided. Attach from rear using the screws supplied.
WALL BRACKET
CONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET
Figure 1-21 Fixing the conduit termination bracket 4. Move the wall bracket to the installation point on the wall. NOTE There are three mounting holes on the wall bracket. Refer to Figure 1-22 for the locations.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 139
GSM-209-423
5. 6. 7.
Align the holes in the wall bracket with the wall fixings. 11 mm diameter clearance holes are provided in the bracket. Secure the wall bracket loosely to the wall using all three fixings. Tighten all three fixings to the required torque. NOTE The torque is dependent upon the type of material the wall bracket is mounted on and the type of fixings used. Seek local specialist assistance if necessary to determine the required torque.
Figure 1-22 shows an Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 wall bracket.

WALL BRACKET
WALL BRACKET FIXINGS
Figure 1-22 Mounting the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 wall bracket
Inst. 140
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Pole mounting
To mount the wall bracket on a pole follow the procedures given below.
Mounting the wall bracket

1. Decide how the cable inputs are to be routed to the wall bracket: If ... By conduit Not by conduit 2. 3. Then ... Go to step 2 Go to step 4
Locate the conduit termination bracket and fixings from installation kit carton A. Locate and secure the conduit termination bracket to the wall bracket (refer to Figure 1-21) using the two M6 screws and washers (plain and spring) provided. Locate pole mounting fittings from installation kit carton A. Referencing Figure 1-23 and Figure 1-24, proceed as follows: Step a. Action Fit the long C channel, using four M6 screws and spring washers, to the top crossbar of the wall mounting bracket, using T30 tamperproof bit. Fit the short C channel, using two M6 screws and spring washers, to the bottom crossbar of the wall mounting bracket, using T30 tamperproof bit. Fit and centralize a clamping bracket to each of the C channels.
4. 5.
b.
c.
C CHANNEL
Figure 1-23 Completed pole mounting of wall bracket

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 141
GSM-209-423
Fitting the bucklestraps

1. With reference to Figure 1-24, thread a bucklestrap, with ears towards the wall bracket, through each clamping bracket.
WALL BRACKET EARS LONG C CHANNEL SHORT C CHANNEL
BUCKLE
BUCKLESTRAP
CLAMPING BRACKETS
Figure 1-24 Bucklestrap detail 2. 3. Position and hold the wall bracket at the installation point on the pole, using the tie wrap provided from installation kit carton A. Pass the top bucklestrap around the pole and up through the buckle, twice. NOTE The buckle must be positioned such that there is sufficient clearance (minimum 330 mm long by 220 mm wide) to enable manipulation of the clamping tool in step 2.
4.
Pull on the loose end of the bucklestrap until the wall bracket sits lightly on the pole.
Inst. 142
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Using the clamping tool

1. With reference to Figure 1-25, prepare the clamping tool by ensuring that the handle is at the end of the thread and the gripper block is close to the nose of the tool.
CUTTER LEVER
NOSE
HANDLE
GRIPPER BLOCK
GRIPPER LEVER
Figure 1-25 Clamping tool 2. To use the clamping tool, (with reference to Figure 1-25): Step a. Action Holding the tool in the left hand, with the gripper lever uppermost, thread the bucklestrap through both the nose and gripper lever block. Push the nose of the tool against the buckle and grip the bucklestrap by applying thumb pressure on the gripper lever. Keeping the applied thumb pressure on the gripper lever, tension the bucklestrap by turning the handle clockwise. Swing the tool over the buckle, while maintaining bucklestrap tension. NOTE: This movement increases the tension on the bucklestrap and, to avoid breakage, the handle must be reversed slightly as the tool is swung over. Cut the bucklestrap by pulling on the cutter lever, and slide tool off in the same position or tension will be lost.
b. c. d.
e. 3. 4. 5. 6.
With reference to Figure 1-24, hammer down the ears over the cut and flattened bucklestrap. Using a spirit level, verify that the wall bracket is positioned straight and level. Repeat from step 3 in Fitting the bucklestraps to step 4 in Using the clamping tool for the bottom clamping bracket. Cut the tie wrap.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 143
Mounting the booster wall bracket
GSM-209-423

Introduction to mounting the booster
The Horizoncompact2 booster is mounted onto the wall using a custom mounting bracket. This procedure provides information on mounting the wall bracket to the allocated position on the wall. It is necessary to mount the wall bracket before installing an Horizoncompact2 booster or any associated cabling. CAUTION It is recommended that local assistance is sought to determine the correct type of fixing for the mounting site material. Refer to the Mounting guidelines section for material classification and fixing guidelines. Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using a torque wrench. The torque values should be chosen to suit the wall material and the total weight of the Horizoncompact2 booster installation.
Tools
Mounting the Horizoncompact2 booster wall bracket on a wall
S S S S S S
Heavy duty hammer drill. Masonry drill bits, of suitable diameter, 150 mm deep (or as required). Roll of insulating tape (or similar). Spirit level. Ratchet with suitable diameter socket. Torque wrench.
Mounting the Horizoncompact2 booster wall bracket on a pole

S S S S
Spirit level. Ruler. Pole mount banding tool. Hammer.
Inst. 144
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Preparing the tools

Assemble all required tools prior to ascending ladder or hydraulic lift cage. NOTE Use of a tool belt is recommended.
Drilling holes for the mounting bolts

To drill the holes for the mounting bolts: 1. 2. 3. Seek local advice on the depth to drill the holes in the wall, then place tape on the drills to the required drilling depth. Carefully position the wall bracket over the mounting point, in accordance with the site plan. Ensure the wall bracket is level using the spirit level. Use the wall bracket to mark the location of each of the four mounting holes (see Figure 1-27). WARNING CAUTION Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes. Drilling masonry and brickwork produces dust, which is harmful to equipment and wiring. Protect the Horizoncompact2, booster and any nearby equipment from dust. Use a waterproof, cloth, or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Clean up any accumulated debris from the installation area carefully before uncovering the equipment.
4. 5.
Drill the holes to the recommended depths. Insert the recommended wall fixings.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 145
GSM-209-423
Wall mounting
To mount the wall bracket: 1. How are the cable inputs to be routed to the wall bracket: If ... By conduit No conduit 2. 3. Then ... Go to step 2 Go to step 4
Locate conduit termination bracket and fixings from the installation kit carton A. Referencing Figure 1-26, 2 x M8 screws are located on the conduit bracket (they are attached to fixed M8 nuts). Remove the screws from the conduit bracket. Place the conduit bracket behind the bottom front lip of the wall bracket and attach using the two M8 screws then tighten to the required torque.
Figure 1-26 Fixing the conduit termination bracket (GSM900 version shown)
Inst. 146
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
4.
As the wall bracket weights approximately 4 kg, care should be taken when handling. Move the wall bracket to the installation point on the wall. There are four mounting holes on the wall bracket. Refer to Figure 1-27 for the locations. Align the holes in the wall bracket with the wall fixings. 11 mm diameter clearance holes are provided in the bracket. Secure the wall bracket loosely to the wall using all four fixings. Tighten all four fixings to the required torque. NOTE The torque depends upon the type of material the wall bracket is mounted on and the type of fixings used. Seek local specialist assistance if necessary to determine the required torque.
5. 6. 7.
Figure 1-27 shows a diagram of the booster bracket.
WALL BRACKET
WALL BRACKET FIXINGS
Figure 1-27 Mounting the booster wall bracket (GSM900 version shown)
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 147
GSM-209-423
Pole mounting
To mount the wall bracket on a pole, follow the procedure given below.
Mounting the wall bracket

1. Decide how the cable inputs are to be routed to the wall bracket: If ... By conduit No conduit 2. 3. Then ... Go to step 2 Go to step 4
Locate conduit termination bracket and fixings from the installation kit carton A. Referencing Figure 1-26 and Figure 1-28, 2 x M8 screws are located on the conduit bracket (they are attached to fixed M8 nuts). Remove the screws from the conduit bracket. Place the conduit bracket behind the bottom front lip of the wall bracket, and attach using the two M8 screws, then tighten to the required torque. As the wall bracket weights approximately 4 kg, care should be taken when handling. Locate pole mounting fittings from installation kit carton A. Referencing Figure 1-28 and Figure 1-29, proceed as follows: Step a. Action Fit the top long C channel with clamping bracket, using three M6 screws and spring washers, to the top section of the wall mounting bracket, using T30 tamperproof bit. Fit the bottom long C channel with clamping bracket, using three M6 screws and spring washers, to the bottom section of the wall mounting bracket, using T30 tamperproof bit.
4. 5.
b.
TOP LONG C CHANNEL
BOTTOM LONG C CHANNEL 6 x M6 NUT (fitted with tamperproof socket) AND WASHER
Figure 1-28 Completed pole mounting of wall bracket (GSM900 version shown)
Inst. 148
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Fitting the bucklestraps

1. Referencing Figure 1-29, thread a bucklestrap, with ears towards the wall bracket, through each clamping bracket.
WALL BRACKET LONG C CHANNEL M6 SCREW AND WASHER
EARS
BUCKLE
BUCKLESTRAP
CLAMPING BRACKETS
Figure 1-29 Bucklestrap detail 2. 3. Position and hold the wall bracket at the installation point on the pole, using the tie wrap provided from installation kit carton A. Pass the top bucklestrap around the pole and up through the buckle, twice. NOTE The buckle must be positioned such that there is sufficient clearance (minimum 330 mm long by 220 mm wide) to enable manipulation of the clamping tool in step 2.
4.
Pull on the loose end of the bucklestrap until the wall bracket sits lightly on the pole.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 149
GSM-209-423
Using the clamping tool

1. With reference to Figure 1-30, prepare the clamping tool by ensuring that the handle is at the end of the thread and the gripper block is close to the nose of the tool.
CUTTER LEVER
NOSE
HANDLE
GRIPPER BLOCK
GRIPPER LEVER
Figure 1-30 Clamping tool 2. To use the clamping tool (Figure 1-30), follow these procedures: Step a. Action Holding the tool in the left hand with the gripper lever uppermost, thread the bucklestrap through both the nose and gripper lever block. Push the nose of the tool against the buckle and grip the bucklestrap by applying thumb pressure on the gripper lever. Keeping the applied thumb pressure on the gripper lever, tension the bucklestrap by turning the handle clockwise. Swing the tool over the buckle, while maintaining bucklestrap tension. NOTE: This movement increases the tension on the bucklestrap and, to avoid breakage, the handle must be reversed slightly as the tool is swung over. Cut the bucklestrap by pulling on the cutter lever and slide tool off in the same position or tension will be lost.
b. c. d.
e. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Referencing Figure 1-29, hammer down the ears over the cut and flattened bucklestrap. Using a spirit level, verify that the wall bracket is positioned straight and level. Repeat from step 3 in Fitting the bucklestraps to step 4 in Using the clamping tool for the bottom clamping bracket. Cut the tie wrap.
Inst. 150
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Power and earth cabling

Introduction to power and earth cabling
This section provides the required specifications of ac power supply isolation, cabling, and cable routeing to be provided for the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures. Use national regulations or refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671 (IEC364). The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 has been designed to be connected to a Terra Neutral (TN) ac supply network only (this is a system of having one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed conductive parts of the installation being connected to that point by protective conductors).
AC isolator
An ac overcurrent circuit breaker and residual current device (RCD) must be used in the ac power supply feed to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure. This circuit breaker should be of dual pole type, with sufficient contactor gap to be used as an isolator, and should meet the requirements of standard EN 60898. The maximum power requirement current rating is:
S S
4 A at 230 V ac heaters on. 8 A at 110 V ac heaters on.
Power cabling thermal properties

Materials and installations method should comply with REC or national standards. Where no suitable requirements exist, the thermal properties of cabling used to supply power must meet the following specifications:
Cable type
3-core power cable, either armoured or conduit routed, chosen to be suitable for the operating environment. This must be used to ensure the connector cable gland seals correctly.
Maximum conductor temperature

Continuous operation: +105 _C. Emergency operation: +130 _C (max. 125 hours/year). Short circuit condition: +160 _C (max. 5 seconds).
Resistance to flame
The cabling used to supply power should be of low-smoke halogen-free classification, with flame-retardant properties and with resistance to flame tested to IEC 332-3 (IEC 332-1).
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 151
GSM-209-423
Cable routeing
WARNING Do not make ac input power connections at the main ac power source at this time.
An adequate means should be provided for routeing cables from the main power source to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure. To prevent the possibility of damage to exposed cables, Motorola recommends that ac power cables are armoured or routed inside a conduit. NOTE The E1 link must be routed to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure in a separate conduit from the ac power cable.
Inst. 152
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Installing BTS enclosure power and earth cabling

Introduction to installing BTS power and earth cabling
WARNING The Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure must be earthed with a conductor which complies with the requirements for the protection from electric shock, as specified in national regulations or refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671 (IEC364). Consideration should also be made on the lightning protection earthing requirements. Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together.
This section describes the procedure for routeing power and earth cabling to the wall bracket prior to installation of the chassis.
Tools
S S S S
Screwdriver set. Wire stripping tool. Crimping tool. Small hacksaw.
AC power schematic
Figure 1-31 shows a schematic of the ac supply power installation.
CUSTOMER AC ISOLATOR AC POWER CONNECTOR Horizonmicro2 OR Horizoncompact2 BTS Horizoncompact2 BOOSTER
(IF APPLICABLE)
CUSTOMER CABLE TO REQUIRED LENGTH
Figure 1-31 Schematic of ac supply power installation

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 153
GSM-209-423
AC power connector
The ac power connector is supplied with a seal. The connections are: WARNING Local regulations may apply for different power cable colours.
S S S S
1 is the neutral cable, coloured blue or black. 2 is the live power cable, coloured brown or red. EARTH (top socket) is the earth cable, coloured green and yellow. 3 is not used. WARNING If the installation being carried out is to be completed at a later date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed) care should be taken to ensure that no ac power connections are left live. Ensure that an indication of the state of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping off potential live cables and by a clear warning label. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached.
Figure 1-32 shows the ac power connector in detail.

METAL RUBBER WASHER WASHER SCREW
CONNECT BLOCK
AC SUPPLY CABLE
SOCKET CONNECTOR FROM SUPPLY CABLE TO ATTACH AS SHOWN L
EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW) E
EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW)
LIVE (BROWN OR RED) AC POWER PLUG ON Horizonmicro2 OR AC POWER SOCKET Horizoncompact2 EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW)
NEUTRAL (BLUE OR BLACK)
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
Figure 1-32 AC power socket and plug

Inst. 154
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
AC power connector procedure

Proceed as follows to attach the ac power connector to the customer cable: WARNING Ensure the mains ac power supply input has been safely isolated, so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked, and warning label attached.
1. 2. 3.
Remove the connector cover. Connect the cables as indicated in Figure 1-32. Refit the connector cover, ensuring that the seal is correctly located and the cable gland is tightened.
Earth connection points

Figure 1-33 provides a view of the wall bracket, showing the main earthing point.
Figure 1-33 Wall bracket, showing earth connection point

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 155
GSM-209-423
Installing the power and E1/HDSL cable conduits

Figure 1-34 provides a view of the power and E1/HDSL conduits, attached to the conduit termination bracket.
WALL BRACKET
WALL BRACKET EARTH TERMINAL CONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET 21 mm DIAMETER
TIP OF CONDUITS
21 mm DIAMETER
CONDUIT FOR AC POWER CONDUIT FOR E1/HDSL CABLE(S) NOTE: THE AC POWER AND E1/HDSL CABLES ARE NOT SHOWN. CONDUIT CABLES AND GLANDS ARE NOT SUPPLIED.
Figure 1-34 Attaching the conduits to the conduit termination bracket CAUTION To prevent water ingress into the conduit, an appropriate silicone sealant must be applied to the tip of the conduit cable and gland. Silicone sealant should also be applied to all exposed armoured shielding on the ac power cable to prevent water ingress.
Inst. 156
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Routeing the ac power cable to the wall bracket

To install the conduit and attach to the conduit termination bracket: WARNING If the installation being carried out is to be completed at a later date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed) care should be taken to ensure that no ac power connections are left live. Ensure that an indication of the state of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping off potential live cables and by a clear warning label. The source should be isolated and locked, and a warning label attached.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Measure the length of cable conduit required to connect the wall bracket to the ac supply power isolator, and cut the conduit to this length. Route the conduit from the ac power isolator to the wall bracket. Connect the conduit to the conduit termination bracket. Feed the ac power cable through the conduit, but do not connect the cables to the isolator at this time. NOTE The conduit termination bracket is attached to the bottom of the wall bracket. See Figure 1-34 for a view of the conduit termination bracket.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 157
GSM-209-423
Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator

An upstream ac supply isolator must be fitted and installed complying with regional electric company (REC) requirements or national requirements. Where no suitable requirements exist in order to connect the earth, live and neutral cables to the power supply isolator: WARNING Ensure the mains ac power supply input isolator switch is in the OFF position before proceeding. If the installation being carried out is to be completed at a later date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed) care should be taken to ensure that no ac power connections are left live. Ensure that an indication of the state of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping off potential live cables and by a clear warning label. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached.
1. 2.
Remove the screws and washers securing the ac terminal block insulated cover, and remove the cover. If armoured cable is used, secure the screen at the entry gland. WARNING Local regulations may apply for different power cable colours.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Connect the earth ac cable (green/yellow) to the earth point in the ac power input isolator and secure. Connect the live ac cable (brown or red) to the live connection in the ac input isolator and secure. Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black), to the neutral connection in the ac power input isolator and secure. Refit and secure the terminal block insulated cover and refit the screws and washers.
Inst. 158
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Connecting the site main earth

The main site earth is to be connected to the wall bracket and then a jumper cable connected to the main earth stud on the chassis. To connect the main site earth to the wall bracket: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Route a cable from the site main earth to the wall bracket. Strip approximately 10 mm of the insulation from the end of the site main earth cable to expose the bare copper conductor. Crimp an M8 post connector to the main earth conductor. Fit a star washer over the M8 main earthing stud, located on the bottom edge of the wall bracket. Place the earth post connector over the M8 main earthing stud, located on the bottom edge of the wall bracket. NOTE 6. Figure 1-34 shows the location of the wall bracket main earthing stud.
Fit a star washer and M8 nut over the top of the connector onto the main earthing stud and tighten to a torque of 10 Nm.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 159
Installing booster power and earth cabling
GSM-209-423

Introduction to booster power and earth cabling
This section describes the procedure for routeing power and earth cabling to the Horizoncompact2 booster wall bracket prior to installation of the chassis. WARNING The booster must be earthed with a conductor which complies with the requirements for the protection from electric shock, as specified in national regulations or refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671 (IEC364). Consideration should also be made on the lightning protection grounding requirements. Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together.
Tools
S S S S
Screwdriver set. Wire stripping tool. Crimping tool. Small hacksaw.
AC power schematic
Figure 1-35 shows a schematic of the ac power installation.
CUSTOMER MAINS ISOLATOR AC POWER CONNECTOR Horizoncompact2 BTS Horizoncompact2 BOOSTER
CUSTOMER CABLE TO REQUIRED LENGTH
Figure 1-35 Schematic of ac power installation
Inst. 160
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
AC power connector
The ac power connector is supplied with seal. The connections are: WARNING Local regulations may apply for different power cable colours.
S S S S
1 is the neutral power cable, coloured blue or black. 2 is the live power cable, coloured brown or red. EARTH (top socket) is the earth cable, coloured green and yellow. 3 is not used. WARNING If the installation being carried out is to be completed at a later date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed) care should be taken to ensure that no ac power connections are left live. Ensure that an indication of the state of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping off potential live cables and by a clear warning label. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached.
Figure 1-36 shows the booster ac power connector in detail.

METAL RUBBER WASHER WASHER SCREW
CONNECT BLOCK
EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW) AC SUPPLY CABLE SOCKET CONNECTOR FROM SUPPLY CABLE TO ATTACH AS SHOWN L E
EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW)
LIVE (BROWN OR RED) AC POWER PLUG ON Horizoncompact2 AC POWER SOCKET BOOSTER EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW)
NEUTRAL (BLUE OR BLACK) NEUTRAL (BLUE OR BLACK)
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
Figure 1-36 Booster ac socket and plug

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 161
GSM-209-423
AC power connector procedure

Proceed as follows to attach the ac power connector to the customer cable: WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolated so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached.
1. 2. 3.
Remove the connector cover. Connect the cables as indicated in Figure 1-36. Refit the connector cover, ensuring that the seal is correctly located and the cable gland tightened.
Earth connection point

Figure 1-37 provides a view of the Horizoncompact2 booster wall bracket, showing the main earthing point. An earth cable is attached to the wall bracket earth stud (it consists of star washer, earth cable connector, star washer and an M8 nut (tightened to 10 Nm)). Sufficient length of earth cable is provided to attach to the Horizoncompact2 booster stud.
EARTH CABLE WALL BRACKET EARTH
Figure 1-37 Booster wall bracket, showing earth connection points (GSM900 version shown)
Inst. 162
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Installing the ac power cable

If conduit is used, Figure 1-38 provides a view of the power and alarm cable conduits, attached to the conduit termination bracket.
CONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET
TIP OF CONDUIT 20.5 mm DIAMETER TIP OF CONDUIT 16 mm DIAMETER CONDUIT FOR AC POWER CABLE 20.5 mm DIAMETER CONDUIT FOR ALARM CABLE (BOX TYPE SHOWN)
NOTE: CONDUIT CABLES AND GLANDS ARE NOT SUPPLIED.
Figure 1-38 Attaching the conduits to the conduit termination bracket (GSM900 version shown) CAUTION To prevent water ingress in the conduit, an appropriate silicone sealant must be applied to the tip of the conduit cable and gland. Silicone sealant should also be applied to all exposed armoured shielding on the ac power cable to prevent water ingress.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 163
GSM-209-423
Routeing the ac power cable to the wall bracket

To install the conduit and attach to the conduit termination bracket: WARNING If the installation being carried out is to be completed at a later date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed), care should be taken to ensure that no ac power connections are left floating. Ensure that an indication of the state of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping off potential live cables and by a clear warning label. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Measure the length of cable conduit required to connect the booster wall bracket to the ac power isolator, and cut the conduit to this length. Route the conduit from the ac power isolator to the booster wall bracket. Connect the conduit to the conduit termination bracket. Feed the ac power cable through the conduit, but do not connect the cables to the isolator at this time. NOTE The conduit termination bracket is attached to the bottom of the wall bracket. See Figure 1-38 for a view of the conduit termination bracket.
Inst. 164
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator

An upstream ac supply isolator must be fitted and installed complying with regional electric company (REC) requirements or national requirements. Where no suitable requirements exist in order to connect the earth, live and neutral cables to the power supply isolator: WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input isolator switch is in the OFF position before proceeding. If the installation being carried out is to be completed at a later date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed), care should be taken to ensure that no ac power connections are left floating. Ensure that an indication of the state of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping off potential live cables and by a clear warning label. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached.
1. 2.
Remove the screws and washers securing the ac terminal block insulated cover and remove the cover. If armoured cable is used, secure the screen at the entry gland. WARNING Local regulations may apply for different power cable colours.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Connect the earth ac cable (green/yellow) to the earth point in the ac input isolator and secure. Connect the live ac cable (brown or red) to the live connection in the ac input isolator, and secure. Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black), to the neutral connection in the ac input isolator and secure. Refit and secure the terminal block insulated cover and refit the screws and washers.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 165
GSM-209-423
Connecting the supplementary earth

The supplementary earth is connected to the wall bracket as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Route a cable from the site main earth to the wall bracket. Strip approximately 10 mm of the insulation from the end of the site main earth cable to expose the bare copper conductor. Crimp an M8 post connector to the main earth conductor. Fit a star washer over the M8 main earthing stud, located on the bottom edge of the wall bracket. Place the earth post connector over the M8 main earthing stud, located on the bottom edge of the wall bracket. NOTE 6. Figure 1-37 shows the location of the wall bracket main earthing stud.
Fit a star washer and M8 nut over the top of the connector onto the main earthing stud and tighten to a torque of 10 Nm.
Inst. 166
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
External antenna cabling guidelines

Refer to the site specific documentation for detailed antenna configurations and connection procedures. Observe the following guidelines when installing RF cables:
S S
Fabricate the RF cables on-site. Keep the RF cables as short as possible to minimize signal losses.
RF connectors Horizonmicro2
The Horizonmicro2 has only one Rx/Tx connector for an external antenna. The other two connector positions are blanked off.
Horizoncompact2
The Horizoncompact2 has three RF connectors, these are used to connect the BTS to the booster unit.
S S S
Rx. Tx1. Tx2.
There are five RF connectors on the Horizoncompact2 booster. Two are used for external antenna connection, the other three are for connection to the BTS.
S S S S S
Antenna 1 (ANT1). Antenna 2 (ANT2). Rx. Tx1. Tx2. NOTE The Rx is duplexed on ANT1 with Tx1.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 167
E1/HDSL link
GSM-209-423
E1/HDSL link
Introduction to E1/HDSL link
The following provides information on the network link cabling used in the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment. NOTE The internal control signal cabling within each Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 is assembled and tested at the factory. No further action is necessary.
E1/HDSL link connections

CAUTION All cables must be armoured or routed inside armoured conduit if there is any possibility of exposed cables to/from the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 being damaged or interfered with in any way. The end user is responsible for transient protection of the E1 link connected to Motorola equipment.
NOTE
In indoor installations, Motorola requires that all E1 link lines brought from outside the building are spark-gap (three-anode gas tube) protected at the building entry point. Where this is not practical, the end user may purchase an optional transient-protection board from Motorola. Consult Motorola about transient protection for the Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 sites. There are three ways to make line connections:
S
120 ohm (E1) twisted pair cable through a line termination module mounted on the underside of the chassis, underneath the customer interface cover. 75 ohm (E1) coaxial cable through a line termination module mounted on the underside of the chassis, underneath the customer interface cover. 135 ohm twisted pair cable through a HDSL line interface (modem) mounted on the underside of the chassis, underneath the customer interface cover.
An adequate means should be provided for routeing E1/HDSL link cables from and to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2. To prevent the possibility of damage to exposed cables, Motorola recommends that the E1/HDSL link cables are routed inside a conduit. NOTE The ac power cable is to be routed to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 in a separate conduit.
Inst. 168
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
E1/HDSL link
Terminology for Tx and Rx

The use of Tx and Rx as driver/receiver designators refer to the network as perceived by the Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure:
S S
Tx indicates the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS connection is driving into the network. Rx indicates the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS connection is receiving from the network.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 169
Installing E1/HDSL link cabling
GSM-209-423

Introduction to installing E1/HDSL link cabling
This section describes the procedure for installing E1/HDSL link cabling.
Tools required
The installation procedure requires the following tools:
S S S
Screwdriver set. Ratchet with socket set. Wire stripping and crimping tool.
Routeing the E1/HDSL link to the wall bracket

To route the E1/HDSL link to the wall bracket: 1. 2. 3. Feed the E1/HDSL link cable(s) through the conduit. Route the conduit from the E1/HDSL link connection point to the wall bracket. Connect the conduit to the conduit termination bracket.
If multiple cables are used for the E1/HDSL conduit, an appropriate seal must be used. NOTE The conduit termination bracket is attached to the bottom of the wall bracket. Cables to be used for the E1/HDSL link should be pre-terminated with the appropriate connector(s).
E1 cabling distance/loss
Recommended distances can only be stated in the form of cable losses:
S
E1 links should involve cable losses of less than 6 dB.
Inst. 170
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
HDSL cabling guidelines

HDSL cable selection
NOTE Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.
To install the twisted pair connection between the BSC cabinet and the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures, or between two Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures, select or install suitable twisted pair cables between the sites. This needs to comply with the following selection guidelines:
S
Up to two pairs of conductors are required between the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS and the BSC cabinet, or between two Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures. The two pairs together comprise a single HDSL link and must share the same connector at both ends. Each tip and ring pair between the BSC cabinet and Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS must be of a twisted construction. The tip and ring must not be mixed between the pairs; that is, tip 1 must not be used as a pair with ring 2. Either unshielded twisted pair (UTP) or shielded twisted pair (STP) may be used. Shielding may be required to comply with specific RFI requirements at the site. Attenuation at 260 kHz should be less than 10.5 dB/km.
S S S
HDSL recommended cable types

Some types of cable are known to perform suitably in HDSL applications, provided they are correctly installed and the guidelines for selection and installation are observed. Recommendations for types of cable are as follows:
S
Unshielded twisted pair: BT CW1308 and equivalents. Category 3 UTP. Category 4 UTP. Category 5 UTP. Category 3 STP. Category 4 STP. Category 5 STP.
Shielded twisted pair:

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 171
GSM-209-423
Cable types not recommended

The performance of some types of cable is known to be unacceptable for HDSL applications. The following cable types should be avoided:
S S
Twisted quad cable is unsuitable for use in HDSL applications and must not be used. Drop wire that consists of two parallel conductors with supporting steel cable. This will work with HDSL but because it is not twisted, it provides little immunity from noise, and is therefore not recommended. Information cable is typically of non-twisted, multicore construction, for example ribbon cable. Its use is not recommended.
HDSL cable installation

NOTE The cable installation must meet the HDSL recommended cable types guidelines given above.
Follow the guidelines below if cabling does not exist between the BSC cabinet and the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures, or between two Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures:
S
Two conductor pairs should be connected between a single Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS and the BSC, or the second Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS; that is, point-to-point only, not point to multipoint. The two pairs must share the same connector at both ends. The use of different gauges of cable in one link should be avoided. Bridge taps in the cable run should be avoided. Loading coils in the cable run must be removed. The isolation between tip and ring should be greater than 1 Mohm (at SELV voltage levels). The isolation between tip and earth should be greater than 1 Mohm (at SELV voltage levels). The isolation between ring and earth should be greater than 1 Mohm (at SELV voltage levels).
S S S S S S
Inst. 172
20th Sep 02
Chapter 2
Installation procedures

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423

i
21 21 21 21 22 23
BTS equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 24 Chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 24 Unpacking the chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 25 25 25 25
Booster equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 26 Chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 26 Unpacking the booster equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the BTS chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installation of the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis installation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting external cables to the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting earth straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Horizonmicro2 antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional internal antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the E1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 210 211 212 212 212 213 214 216 217 218 219 222 222 222 223
Battery/cover installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 224 Installing the battery and cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 224 Installing the booster chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing booster chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
225 225 225 226 227 228
68P02902W63-O
iii
GSM-209-423
Connecting external cables to the booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to connecting booster external cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting earth straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary earth connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Rx, Tx and antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the alarms cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the security bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
229 229 229 230 231 232 235 236 237 237 240 240 240 241
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Overview of installation procedures

Introduction to the procedures
This chapter provides the information required to install a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure and its internal and external interfaces. NOTE Some equipment at the site may not be produced by Motorola. Examples of such equipment may include battery chargers, power supplies, and antennas. Refer to site specific documentation and the vendor instructions provided with non Motorola equipment.
Before starting an installation, prepare the site according to the description in Chapter 1 of this category and the site specific documentation.
Installation procedures
Installing the equipment consists of the procedures described in Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Installation procedures Procedure Unpacking the BTS and booster* chassis equipment. Installing the BTS and booster* chassis. Connecting power, antenna, E1/HDSL and earth cables. Fitting the battery. Description Provides the procedures for removing the chassis from the packaging. Provides the procedures for mounting the chassis. Describes external cable connections. The battery is packed separate from the chassis and must be fitted after installation of the chassis. Provides the procedure for enclosing the chassis at the completion of installation. Covers the Horizonmicro2, Horizoncompact2 and booster.
Installing the solar cover.
* The booster is supplied with Horizoncompact2 only. NOTE All site equipment associated with the enclosure must be completely installed before commissioning the equipment for operation. Equipment does not include a battery charger.
E1 link testing
If an E1 link has been provided, contact the local mobile switching centre (MSC) and arrange to test the line back to the BSC at the earliest opportunity.
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 21
GSM-209-423
Torque values
The torque values listed in Table 2-2 are to be used when installing the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment. Table 2-2 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 torque values Item BTS chassis Chassis earth stud Customer interface cover (clamp) Sealant cover Strain relief clamp Battery/Battery cover Expansion casting Chassis/wall bracket Transport handle BTS cover Solar cover/chassis Booster chassis Chassis earth stud Security bracket Chassis/wall bracket Transport handle Booster cover Solar cover/chassis Fibre optic expansion Expansion casting Fibre cable M5 Torx M5 Torx 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm Field only Field only M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only M8 nut M8 skt hd M8 skt hd M8 skt hd 10 Nm 10 Nm 10 Nm 10 Nm Field only Field only Field only Factory & field M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only M8 nut M5 Torx M5 Torx M3 Torx M5 Torx M5 Torx M8 skt hd M6 Torx 10 Nm 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm 1.2 Nm 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm 10 Nm 3.4 Nm Field only Field only Field only Field only Field only Field only Field only Factory & field Size/Type Torque Where
Inst. 22
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Accessing the equipment

WARNING Observe all relevant safety requirements when working above ground level. It is recommended that a suitable safety harness (EN355/European standard), attached to the cage of the hydraulic lift via a shock absorber, is worn by all staff working above ground level.
Hydraulic lift
WARNING The operating instructions for the hydraulic lift should be read before use, and all applicable warnings and cautions should be observed.
It is recommended that a hydraulic lift is used to access the equipment if it is mounted above ground/floor level. Consideration should be given to the required safe lifting capacity of the hydraulic lift, allowing adequate capacity for two people with tools, plus the equipment to be installed.
Scaffolding/platform
WARNING The scaffolding and platform should have a stabilizer fitted, which should be used to keep the platform stable when in use.
Under certain circumstances, it may be more appropriate to use scaffolding, with a platform, to access the equipment as an alternative to a hydraulic lift. Consideration should be given to the required safe load-bearing capacity of the scaffolding, allowing adequate capacity for two people with tools, plus the equipment to be installed.
Ladders
WARNING The ladders should be secured to keep them stable when in use.
Under certain circumstances, it may be more appropriate to use ladders to access the equipment as an alternative to a hydraulic lift. Consideration should be given to the required safe load-bearing capacity of the ladders.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 23
BTS equipment delivery and packaging
GSM-209-423
BTS equipment delivery and packaging

Chassis equipment
The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis are delivered pre-configured and are ready to be installed and connected. The BTS chassis is packed in a polythene protective barrier bag for shipping and storage. The barrier bag and desiccant should be discarded with environmental consideration. The BTS chassis equipment is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The contents of the container are shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 BTS chassis and shipping container (carton C)

Inst. 24
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Unpacking the chassis equipment
Unpacking the chassis equipment

Introduction to the unpacking
The following describes the procedure for opening the shipping container and unpacking the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 chasses. See BTS equipment delivery and packaging for packaging details.
Tools required
This procedure requires a knife.
Unpacking the equipment

WARNING An equipped Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis (without battery or cover) weighs 21 kg. Fully fitted weight can be 28 kg. Handle with extreme care and observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying. Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched or damaged in any way while being unpacked. The chassis should not be removed from the protective barrier bag until the equipment is ready to be installed and powered up. If the protective barrier bag has been removed, and the unit cannot be immediately installed and powered up, the chassis should be stored in a weather protected environment.
CAUTION
To remove the chassis, carry out the following procedure: NOTE 1. 2. 3. The removal of cartons A, B and C from the shipping container is described in Chapter 1 of this category.
Cut open the sealed environmental bag containing the chassis carton C, taking care not to damage the equipment in any way. Remove the cardboard cover, and carefully lift the chassis out of carton C. The bag and carton C remain in the main cardboard container. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any damage to the transport company.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 25
Booster equipment delivery and packaging
GSM-209-423
Booster equipment delivery and packaging

Chassis equipment
The Horizoncompact2 booster chassis is delivered pre-configured and is ready to be installed and connected. The booster chassis is packed in a polythene protective barrier bag for shipping and storage. The barrier bag and desiccant should be discarded with environmental consideration. The booster chassis equipment is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The contents of the container are shown in Figure 2-2.
GSM900 VERSION SHOWN
Figure 2-2 Booster chassis and shipping container (carton C)

Inst. 26
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Unpacking the booster equipment
Unpacking the booster equipment

Introduction to unpacking the equipment
The following describes the procedure for dismantling the shipping container and unpacking the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis. See Booster equipment delivery and packaging for packaging details.
Tools required
This procedure requires a knife.
Unpacking the equipment

WARNING An equipped Horizonmicro2 GSM900 booster chassis (without battery or cover) weighs 21 kg; fully fitted weight can be 28 kg. The DCS1800 version weighs 19 kg (without battery or cover) or 24 kg fully equipped. Handle with extreme care and observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying. Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched or damaged in any way during this procedure. The chassis should not be removed from the protective barrier bag until the equipment is ready to be installed and powered up. If the protective barrier bag has been removed and the unit cannot be immediately installed and powered up, the chassis should be stored in a weather protected environment.
CAUTION
To remove the booster chassis, carry out the following procedure: NOTE 1. 2. 3. The removal of cartons A, B and C from the shipping container is described in Chapter 1 of this category.
Cut open the sealed environmental bag containing the chassis carton C, taking care not to damage the equipment in any way. Remove the cardboard cover, and carefully lift the chassis out of carton C. The bag and carton C remain in the main cardboard container. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any damage to the transport company.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 27
Installing the BTS chassis
GSM-209-423

Introduction to installation of the BTS
This procedure provides instructions for installing the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis onto the wall bracket. CAUTION The chassis should not be removed from the protective barrier bag until the equipment is ready to be installed and powered up. If the protective barrier bag has been removed and the unit cannot be immediately installed and powered up, the chassis should be stored in a weather protected environment.
Tools required
S S S
Screwdriver set. Ratchet, with 1/4 inch drive socket to fit 6 mm hex tool bit. Torque wrench. CAUTION Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using a torque wrench. The torque values are provided earlier in this chapter.
Inst. 28
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Equipment access procedure

The preferred method of access for Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment fitted above ground/floor level is using a hydraulic lift. Scaffolding or ladders can be used if appropriate, or if a hydraulic lift is not available. NOTE Exercise great care when using hydraulic lifting gear and observe all instruction and safety precautions. If the installation is being carried out in a public area, a suitable area around the site of the installation must be cordoned off to prevent members of the public accessing the site. If possible, a third member of the installation team should be stationed at the site to ensure that the designated site area is not accessed by members of the public.
To access the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment using a hydraulic lift: WARNING An equipped Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis (without battery or cover) weighs 21 kg. Fully fitted weight can be 28 kg. Handle with extreme care and observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying.
1. 2. 3.
Move the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis to the cage of the hydraulic lift. Collect the necessary tools and equipment, and enter the cage of the hydraulic lift. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to the installation point on the wall, so that the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis is as close as possible to the wall bracket.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 29
GSM-209-423
Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket

To install the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis: WARNING An equipped Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis (without battery or cover) weighs 21 kg. Fully fitted weight can be 28 kg. Handle with extreme care and observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying.
1.
Using the handles either side of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis, align and locate the lugs on the back of the chassis onto the forks on either side of the wall bracket (see Figure 2-3). Using the two long M8 bolts and washers supplied, secure the top of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis to the wall bracket. Using the short M8 bolt and washers supplied, secure the bottom of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis to the bottom fixing of the mounting bracket. Tighten the three M8 bolts to the correct torque. WARNING The carrying/lifting handles should only be removed after the chassis has been fully secured with the three M8 bolts.
2. 3.
4.
5.
Remove the three M6 screws securing each carrying/lifting handle to the sides of the chassis. Remove both handles and store for future use, with the six M6 retaining screws.
Inst. 210
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Chassis installation diagram

Figure 2-3 shows the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis being installed onto the wall bracket.
CARRYING/LIFTING HANDLE CARRYING/LIFTING HANDLE
Figure 2-3 Installing the BTS chassis

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 211
Connecting external cables to the enclosure
GSM-209-423

Introduction to connecting cables
WARNING The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 must be earthed with a conductor capable of carrying the full fault current of the overcurrent protection device. Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together. The ac input power connections must not be made at the main power source at this time. The power-up procedure is provided at the end of this chapter. Ensure that LIVE and NEUTRAL are correctly connected at the power source; additional risk to personnel or damage to the equipment may result in the event of an internal fault.
The principal connections to be made when installing a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 are:

S
Earth connections at the following points: AC protective earth for the PSM (Power Supply Module), connected together with line and neutral ac power conductors within one cable to the socket supplied (including seal). Earth/lightning protection via the wall mounting bracket M8 stud.
S S S S
AC power supply to the PSM. External antenna connection (if fitted). External antenna connections fitted to the booster. E1/HDSL link. NOTE The alarms connector is fitted during commissioning.
Tools required
S S S S S
Screwdriver set. Ratchet with 1/4 inch socket. Wire stripping and crimping tool. T25 tamperproof bit (supplied). T30 tamperproof bit (supplied).
Inst. 212
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Connecting earth straps

WARNING All earth strap connections must be secured between two star washers on each earth stud.
Supplementary earth
A supplementary earth cable may be connected to the M8 threaded earth stud on the wall bracket. This facility is available for additional protection in exposed environments. A factory supplied earth cable is fitted to the wall bracket earth point. At the bottom of the chassis is a M8 threaded earth stud. Once the chassis is installed on the wall bracket, the supplementary earth cable is connected to the supplementary earth stud on the chassis. Figure 2-4 shows the location of the supplementary site earth connection to the chassis via the wall bracket.
CHASSIS EARTH
WALL BRACKET EARTH
Figure 2-4 Supplementary earth connection to chassis via wall bracket
Safety earth
The ac supply (safety) earth is connected via the green/yellow conductor of the ac power supply cable to the PSM. The PSM is internally bonded to the chassis by a factory-fitted earth cable.
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 213
GSM-209-423
Connecting the ac power cable

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolated, so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked, and warning label attached.
To connect the ac power cable: 1. Ensure the gasket is fitted prior to the ac power socket, then insert the ac power socket into the ac power plug of the ac-dc PSM, as indicated in Figure 2-5. Remove the plastic cable clips from the polythene bag provided, then route and secure the power cable using four cable clip locations down the side of the cabinet, two cable grips on the inside of the casing and cable clip at central entry point, as indicated in Figure 2-5.
2.
Inst. 214
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Figure 2-5 shows the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 gasket and plastic clip positions.
GASKET RX, TX CONNECTORS
AC INPUT CONNECTOR
FOUR CABLE CLIP LOCATIONS FOR AC POWER CABLE
TWO AC POWER CABLE GRIPPING POINTS ON INSIDE OF COVER AC POWER CABLE CLIP FOR ALARMS CONNECTOR E1 LINK EXTERNAL ENTRY TO CABINET FOR BOOSTER CONNECTORS (ONLY USED ON HORIZONCOMPACT2) SOCKET CONNECTOR FROM SUPPLY CABLE TO ATTACH AS SHOWN EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW) HDSL LINK CONNECTORS
AC POWER PLUG ON Horizonmicro2 OR Horizoncompact2
(NOT USED) LIVE (BROWN OR RED)
(NOT USED)
LIVE (BROWN OR RED)
Figure 2-5 Gasket and plastic clip positions

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 215
GSM-209-423
Connecting the Horizonmicro2 antenna cable

To connect a common transmit/receive antenna: NOTE The following procedure applies if an optional internal antenna is not fitted. The antenna connector has to fit snugly under the solar cover, and for this reason must be a N-type 90 elbow, environmentally sealed to IP55, Huber and Suhner 16N-50-3-33-133 IP. It is assumed that pre-terminated coaxial cables are to be used for the antenna feeders.
1. 2.
Route a coaxial jumper lead from the transmit/receive antenna feeder connector on the antenna junction to the wall bracket. Route the cable through the centre aperture of the conduit termination bracket up from the bottom. The cable can be alternatively routed down from the top of the enclosure, depending on installation and customer requirement. Connect the N-type (90) antenna connector to the antenna port on the centre front of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-6.
DUMMY CONNECTORS RX,/TX CONNECTOR
3.
Figure 2-6 View of Horizonmicro2 chassis, showing Rx/Tx connector position
Inst. 216
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Optional internal antenna

Figure 2-7 shows a Horizonmicro2 enclosure fitted with an optional internal antenna, secured to the front heatsink. The optional internal antenna has a gain of 8.5 dB and is vertically polarized.
INTERNAL ANTENNA
Figure 2-7 Optional internal antenna mounted on the Horizonmicro2 chassis

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 217
GSM-209-423
Connecting the booster cables

NOTE This procedure only applies to the Horizoncompact2 BTS. The Tx and Rx connectors have to fit snugly under the solar cover, and for this reason must be an N-type 90 elbow, environmentally sealed to IP55, Huber and Suhner 16N-50-3-33-133 IP. It is assumed that pre-terminated coaxial cables are to be used for the antenna feeders.
To connect the booster cables to the Horizoncompact2 BTS: 1. Route each coaxial jumper lead cable either down from the top of the enclosure, or up from the bottom of the enclosure to the relevant connector at the front of the unit, as shown in Figure 2-8. Connect each N-type (90) booster connector to the relevant RF port, as shown in Figure 2-8.
2.
Figure 2-8 shows the Horizoncompact2 cable connectors.
NOTE: ENSURE SEALED RIGHT ANGLED CONNECTOR HUBER & SUHNER PART NO. 16N-50-3-33-133 AC INPUT CONNECTOR AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
RDIS MODULE DTRX MODULE TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (N type) TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (N type) RX CABLE CONNECTOR (N type)
Figure 2-8 View of Horizoncompact2 chassis, showing cable connectors

Inst. 218
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Connecting the E1/HDSL link

J3 (MMI)
ALARMS CONNECTOR FROM BOOSTER (ACTIVE ON HORIZONCOMPACT2 ONLY)
DINO (E1/HDSL)
J11 J13 J12
RHINO (E1/HDSL)
J14 J15 J16 J17 J13 J12
DINO LABEL
J11
PORT PIN TX 3 & 8 B RX 4 & 9 INTERNAL SLAVE INTERNAL MASTER
J13
HDSL OPTION
J12
RHINO LABEL
ALARM
J14
TX A
J15
RX A
J16
TX B
J17
RX B
INTERNAL SLAVE
J13
INTERNAL MASTER
HDSL OPTION
J12
Figure 2-9 Location of customer interface connectors NOTE CAUTION It is assumed that cables to be used for the E1/HDSL links are pre-terminated with the appropriate connector. Inspect the E1 connectors carefully for signs of damage before making connections to the BTS. A damaged connector will result in the BTS going out of service or one carrier being reported as DRI inhibited. For T43 connectors, inspect both the plugs on the BTS and the sockets on the mating cable. Attach the socket gently, keeping it as straight as possible to the plug. For D-type connectors, use a connector shell with appropriate cable restraints.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 219
GSM-209-423
DINO module connections

Table 2-3 lists the DINO (E1) module connections. Table 2-3 DINO (E1) module interconnections Pin no. J11-1 J11-2 J11-3 J11-4 J12-1 J12-5 J13-1 J13-5 Function CHANNEL 1 Tx1+ CHANNEL 1 Rx1+ CHANNEL 2 Tx2+ CHANNEL 2 Rx2+ HDSL_EXT_1A+ HDSL_EXT_1B+ HDSL_EXT_2A+ HDSL_EXT_2B+ NOTE Pin no. J11-6 J11-7 J11-8 J11-9 J12-3 J12-7 J13-3 J13-7 Function CHANNEL 1 Tx1 CHANNEL 1 Rx1 CHANNEL 2 Tx2 CHANNEL 2 Rx2 HDSL_EXT_1A HDSL_EXT_1B HDSL_EXT_2A HDSL_EXT_2B
The J12 and J13 RJ45 connector pinouts on the DINO are non standard. If a D-type to RJ45 adapter cable is used to connect an external modem, the cable must be configured so that the D-type pins 4, 9, 1, 6 connect to RJ45 pins 3, 1, 7, 5 respectively.
RHINO module connections

Table 2-4 lists the RHINO module connections. Table 2-4 RHINO module connections Pin no. J12-1 J12-5 J13-1 J13-5 J14 Centre J15 Centre J16 Centre J17 Centre Function HDSL_EXT_1A+ HDSL_EXT_1B+ HDSL_EXT_2A+ HDSL_EXT_2B+ CHANNEL 1 Tx1+ CHANNEL 1 Rx1+ CHANNEL 2 Tx2+ CHANNEL 2 Rx2+ Pin no. J12-3 J12-7 J13-3 J13-7 J14 Shield J15 Shield J16 Shield J17 Shield Function HDSL_EXT_1A HDSL_EXT_1B HDSL_EXT_2A HDSL_EXT_2B CHANNEL 1 Tx1 (ac coupled to earth) CHANNEL 1 Rx1 (earth) CHANNEL 2 Tx2 (ac coupled to earth) CHANNEL 2 Rx2 (earth)
NOTE
The J12 and J13 RJ45 connector pinouts on the RHINO are non standard. If a D-type to RJ45 adapter cable is used to connect an external modem, the cable must be configured so that the D-type pins 4, 9, 1, 6 connect to RJ45 pins 3, 1, 7, 5 respectively.
Inst. 220
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
E1/HDSL link and alarms connection procedure

To connect the E1/HDSL link(s) and alarms cable: 1. 2. 3. 4. Unscrew the sealant cover (four M5 screws) of the customer interface clamp. Remove the strain relief clamp (seven M3 screws). Feed the cables through the strain relief clamp and main bracket. Attach the connectors as indicated by the following table: If ... T43 connectors D-type connection HDSL connection Alarms cable connection Then ... Insert the T43 coaxial connectors into the appropriate sockets (J14, J15, J16, J17) on the RHINO module. Insert the 9 pin D-type connector into the socket J11 on the DINO module. Insert the HDSL connector(s) into the appropriate socket (J12 and/or J13) on the RHINO or DINO (E1) module. The alarms connector is not attached to the BTS until commissioning. Leave sufficient cable slack to make the connection to the appropriate socket.
Fitting the customer interface clamp

To fit the customer interface clamp: 1. Fit the main bracket (see Figure 2-10) to the chassis casing (four M5 screws) and tighten the screws to the correct torque. CAUTION 2. 3. Ensure the cable connectors are firmly in place and that the cables are clamped without affecting the connectors.
Tighten the strain relief clamp (seven M3 screws) to seal the clamp onto the cables. Fit the sealant cover (four M5 screws) and tighten the screws to the correct torque.
CUSTOMER INTERFACE CLAMP MAIN BRACKET (FIT TO CHASSIS CASING) CABLES TO CHASSIS CONNECTORS
SEALANT COVER STRAIN RELIEF CLAMP EXTERNAL CABLES IN UNDERSIDE VIEW
Figure 2-10 Customer interface clamp used to protect E1/HDSL and alarm connectors
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 221
Installing the BTS solar cover
GSM-209-423

Introduction to installing the BTS solar cover
This procedure provides instructions for installing the solar cover onto the chassis. CAUTION Screws should be tightened to the specified torque for the screw size using a torque wrench. The torque values are given at the start of this chapter.
Tools and equipment

S S
Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket to fit a tamperproof T25 tool bit. Torque wrench. Solar cover. Blank label push-in clip.
This procedure requires the following items from the installation kit, carton B:
S S
Inst. 222
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Fitting the solar cover

To fit the solar cover to the chassis: 1. Ensure that the two M5 tamperproof screws on the lower front of the chassis have been released such that the end of the screws are flush with the top of the bottom securing lugs. Position the solar cover over the chassis. Lift the solar cover slightly above the top of the chassis, and align with the sides of the rear cover. Slightly angle the top of the solar cover, push towards the chassis and downwards, until it is positioned on the chassis top locating lugs. Ensure that the solar cover is located on the bottom securing lugs, and is flush with the back cover. Secure the solar cover to the chassis by tightening the two M5 tamperproof screws evenly to the correct torque.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Figure 2-11 shows the solar cover being mounted onto the chassis.
BLANK LABEL OR CUSTOMER OPTION PUSH-IN CLIP
ig.056.rh
Figure 2-11 Installing the solar cover

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 223
Battery/cover installation
GSM-209-423
Battery/cover installation
Installing the battery and cover
Perform the following procedure to install the battery and cover onto the chassis: 1. Using a clean, dry cloth, wipe the underside of the chassis to remove any excess moisture, and wipe any excess moisture from the gasket seal around the underside of the chassis. Unpack the battery pack from its protective wrapping and inspect for any damage. See Figure 2-12 for details of the battery and its mounting position on the chassis. Insert the supplied 20 A blade fuse into holder on the top of battery pack. Prior to insertion, check integrity of fuse by visual inspection. Ensure that the two pin connector is positioned at the left end of the chassis and position the battery pack on the underside of the chassis. Ensure interface cables are routed out of cable exit channel on the battery/cover. Secure in place using the two M5 tamperproof screws and apply correct torque.
2.
3. 4.
5.
CABLE EXIT CHANNEL BLADE FUSE BATTERY/COVER
Figure 2-12 Battery and location

Inst. 224
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Installing the booster chassis

Introduction to installing booster chassis
This procedure provides instructions for installing the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis onto the wall bracket. CAUTION The chassis should not be removed from the protective barrier bag until the equipment is ready to be installed and powered up. If the protective barrier bag has been removed and the unit cannot be immediately installed and powered up, the chassis should be stored in a weather protected environment.
Tools required
S S S
Screwdriver set. Ratchet, with 1/4 in drive socket to fit 6 mm hex tool bit. Torque wrench. CAUTION Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using a torque wrench. The torque values are provided at the start of this chapter.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 225
GSM-209-423
Antenna cabling
There are two options for antenna cabling to the Horizoncompact2 booster unit, depending on site installation layout. If the antenna cables are to exit from the top of the Horizoncompact2 booster unit, then the wall bracket RF cables must be fitted before the Horizoncompact2 booster is lifted onto the wall bracket. 1. 2. Secure the bulkhead connectors to the wall bracket on the upper return flange. Secure cables to the wall bracket with the cable ties supplied.
Figure 2-13 shows the antenna cabling details.

ANTENNA CABLES
UPPER RETURN FLANGE TIE WRAPS
GSM900 VERSION
ANTENNA CABLES
UPPER RETURN FLANGE
TIE WRAPS
DCS1800 VERSION
Figure 2-13 Securing antenna cables (Horizoncompact2 booster)

Inst. 226
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423

The preferred method of access for Horizoncompact2 booster equipment fitted above ground/floor level is via a hydraulic lift. Scaffolding or ladders can be used if appropriate, or if a hydraulic lift is not available. NOTE Exercise great care when using hydraulic lifting gear and observe all instruction and safety precautions. If the installation is being carried out in a public area, a suitable area around the site of the installation must be cordoned off to prevent members of the public accessing the site. If possible, a third member of the installation team should be stationed at the site to ensure that the designated site area is not accessed by members of the public.
To access the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment using a hydraulic lift: WARNING An equipped Horizonmicro2 GSM900 booster chassis (without battery or cover) weighs 21 kg; fully fitted weight can be 28 kg. The DCS1800 version weighs 19 kg (without battery or cover) or 24 kg fully equipped. Handle with extreme care and observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying.
1. 2. 3.
Move the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis to the cage of the hydraulic lift. Collect the necessary tools and equipment, and enter the cage of the hydraulic lift. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to the installation point on the wall, so that the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis is as close as possible to the wall bracket.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 227
GSM-209-423
Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket

To install the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis (refer to Figure 2-14): 1. 2. 3. Using the handles either side of the booster chassis, align and locate the bracket fixing positions, then place the booster securely in the bracket. Remove the four M8 screws securing each carrying/lifting handle to the sides of the chassis. Remove both handles and store for future use. Using the four M8 bolts and washers removed from the handles, secure the booster to the mounting bracket.
M8 BOLTS AND WASHERS
GSM900 VERSION
CARRYING/LIFTING HANDLES M8 BOLTS AND WASHERS
M8 BOLTS AND WASHERS (SEE NOTE)
DCS1800 VERSION
CARRYING/LIFTING HANDLES
Figure 2-14 Installing the booster chassis

Inst. 228
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Connecting external cables to the booster

Introduction to connecting booster external cables
WARNING The Horizoncompact2 booster must be earthed with a conductor capable of carrying the full fault current of the overcurrent protection device. Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together. The ac input power connections must not be made at the main power source at this time. The power-up procedure is provided at the end of this chapter. Ensure that LIVE and NEUTRAL are correctly connected at the power source; additional risk to personnel or damage to the equipment may result in the event of an internal fault.
The principal connections to be made when installing an Horizoncompact2 booster are:

S
Earth connections at the following points: The protective earth for the BPSM (Booster Power Supply Module), connected together with line and neutral ac power conductors within one cable to the socket supplied (including seal). Earth/lightning protection via the wall mounting bracket M8 stud.
AC power supply to the BPSM. NOTE The alarms connector is fitted during commissioning.
Tools required
S S S S S
Screwdriver set. Ratchet with 1/4 inch socket. Wire stripping and crimping tool. T25 tamperproof bit (supplied). T30 tamperproof bit (supplied).

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 229
GSM-209-423
Connecting earth straps

WARNING All earth strap connections must be secured between two star washers on each earth stud.
Safety earth
The ac supply supply (safety) earth is connected via the green/yellow conductor of the ac power supply cable to the PSM. The PSM is internally bonded to the chassis by a factory-fitted earth cable.
Supplementary earth
A supplementary earth cable may be connected to the M8 threaded earth stud on the wall bracket. This facility is available for additional protection in exposed environments. A factory-supplied supplementary earth cable is fitted to the wall bracket stud and this is connected to the chassis earth stud, once the chassis is installed on the wall bracket.
Inst. 230
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Supplementary earth connection diagram

Figure 2-15 shows the location of the supplementary earth connection to the booster chassis via the wall bracket.
GSM900 VERSION
BOOSTER EARTH WALL BRACKET EARTH
DCS1800 VERSION
BOOSTER EARTH WALL BRACKET EARTH
Figure 2-15 Supplementary earth connection to booster via wall bracket

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 231
GSM-209-423
Connecting the Rx, Tx and antenna cables

To connect the antenna cables: NOTE It is assumed that pre-terminated coaxial cables are to be used for the antenna feeders. The Rx is duplexed on antenna 1 (ANT1) with Tx1. There are two options for antenna cabling to the booster unit. If the antenna cables require exiting from the top of the booster, then the antenna cable must be secured to the wall bracket first (see Installing booster chassis). Then... Carry out steps 1 and 3. Carry out steps 2 and 3.
If... Wall bracket antennas are to be used Antenna cables are to be used entering the bottom of the unit 1. 2.
Route ANT 1 and ANT 2 in the positions as shown in Figure 2-16. The antennas should be terminated and connected to the relevant ANT1 and ANT2 port on the Horizoncompact2 booster as shown in Figure 2-16 (not using the wall bracket antenna cables). NOTE In this case only straight 50 ohm N-type plug connectors are to be terminated and sealed for the outdoor environment.
3.
Route each of the three coaxial jumper lead cables (Rx, Tx1 and Tx2), extending from the top of the Horizoncompact2 BTS to the relevant N-type connector port on the booster, as shown in Figure 2-16 (GSM900 version) or Figure 2-17 (DCS1800 version) and connect up.
Inst. 232
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
GSM900 antenna configurations
TX2 SLAVE CABLE RX CABLE INDICATOR ANT2 WALL BRACKET CABLE
ANT1 WALL BRACKET ANTENNA CABLE
TX1 MASTER CABLE EARTH CONNECTION
TX2 SLAVE CABLE ANT2 ANTENNA CABLE
ANT1 ANTENNA CABLE
RX TX1 CABLE MASTER EARTH CABLE INDICATOR CONNECTION
Figure 2-16 Rx, Tx and antenna connections (two GSM900 configurations)

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 233
GSM-209-423
DCS1800 antenna configurations
INDICATOR
TX2 SLAVE CABLE TX1 MASTER CABLE RX CABLE ANT2 WALL BRACKET CABLE EARTH CONNECTION
ANT1 WALL BRACKET ANTENNA CABLE
INDICATOR
TX2 SLAVE CABLE TX1 MASTER CABLE RX CABLE EARTH CONNECTION ANT2 ANTENNA CABLE
ANT1 ANTENNA CABLE
Figure 2-17 Rx, Tx and antenna connections (two DCS1800 configurations)
Inst. 234
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Connecting the ac power cable

WARNING Ensure the mains ac power supply input has been safely isolated, so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked, and warning label attached.
To connect the ac power cable, first ensure the gasket is fitted prior to the ac power socket then insert the ac power connector into the ac power plug on the underside of the booster, as indicated in Figure 2-18.
GSM900 VERSION
DCS1800 VERSION
GASKET
SOCKET CONNECTOR FROM SUPPLY CABLE TO ATTACH AS SHOWN
GASKET EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW)
(NOT USED) LIVE (BROWN OR RED)
(NOT USED)
LIVE (BROWN OR RED)
AC POWER SOCKET
Horizoncompact2 BOOSTER AC POWER PLUG
Figure 2-18 Fitting the ac plug

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 235
GSM-209-423
Setting up the clamp

To connect the ac power and alarms cable to the cable clamp, refer to Figure 2-19 and proceed as follows: 1. 2. Loosen the clamp screws and remove the bottom part. On the GSM900 booster, feed the alarms cable through the first position in the clamp and the ac cable through the third position in the clamp. On the DCS1800 booster, feed the ac cable through the first position in the clamp and the alarms cable through the third position in the clamp. 3. Refit the bottom main clamp to the chassis casing and tighten the clamp screws to secure the cables in position.
GSM900 VERSION DCS1800 VERSION
AC POWER CABLE ALARMS CABLE
ALARMS CABLE AC POWER CABLE
CABLE CLAMP
CABLE CLAMP
Figure 2-19 Clamping the ac power and alarms cables
Inst. 236
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Connecting the alarms cable

The alarms connector, with cable attached, is not fitted during installation. Instead, an alarms indicator is temporarily fitted to the Horizoncompact2 booster to provide visual indication of power to the unit. NOTE The alarms connector should not be fitted until commissioning (see Chapter 4 Commissioning of this category).
Fitting the security bracket

The security bracket is not fitted during installation, unless the commissioning is to be carried out on another day. NOTE The security bracket should not normally be fitted until commissioning (see Chapter 4 Commissioning of this category). The Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover cannot be attached to the booster without the security bracket being fitted.
To fit the security bracket, refer to Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21 and proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the indicator and store in a safe location for use during commissioning. Fit the alarms connector to the Horizoncompact2 booster for corrosion protection. Release the two M8 bolts secured to the booster backplate. Slide the security plate up into position and refit the two M8 security bolts to the recommended torque. Insert in turn an M8 x 16 screw at each edge fixing position of the security bracket, then insert the blade of a screwdriver through the outer security bracket hole in order to reach the screw head inside, as shown in Figure 2-20 (GSM900 version) or Figure 2-21 (DCS1800 version). Finally, tighten the screws to secure the bracket.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 237
GSM-209-423
GSM900 security bracket attachment

Figure 2-20 illustrates a GSM900 security bracket attachment to a booster unit.
ALARMS CONNECTOR INDICATOR
BACKPLATE
SCREW POSITIONS (M8 x 16)
SCREW POSITION (M8 x 16)
KEY HOLE
SECURITY BRACKET
SCREWDRIVER
Figure 2-20 GSM900 security bracket attachment to booster unit

Inst. 238
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
DCS1800 security bracket attachment

Figure 2-21 illustrates a DCS1800 security bracket attachment to a booster unit.
ALARMS CONNECTOR INDICATOR
BACKPLATE
SCREW POSITION (M8 x 16) KEY HOLE
SECURITY BRACKET
SCREWDRIVER
Figure 2-21 DCS1800 security bracket attachment to booster unit

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 239
Installing the booster solar cover
GSM-209-423

Introduction to installing the booster solar cover
The booster solar cover is not fitted during installation, unless commissioning is to be carried out on another day. CAUTION Screws should be tightened to the specified torque for the screw size using a torque wrench. The torque values are given in Overview of installation procedures at the start of this chapter.
This procedure provides instructions for installing the solar cover onto the chassis.
Tools and equipment required

S S
Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket to fit tamperproof T25 tool bit. Torque wrench. Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover.
This procedure requires the following items from the installation kit, carton C:
S
Inst. 240
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Fitting the booster solar cover

When commissioning is carried out on another day, the solar cover must be fitted at the end of installation. In order to fit the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover to the chassis: 1. Ensure that the two M5 tamperproof screws on the lower front cover brackets of the booster are released to fit the security bracket key hole slot, as shown in Figure 2-20 or Figure 2-21. Place solar cover onto the booster mounting bolts, by tilting lower cover and pushing into key hole position, then push forward to secure. Secure the cover by tightening the M5 security screws evenly to the specified torque.
2. 3.
Figure 2-22 shows the booster solar cover being mounted onto the chassis.
SOLAR COVER
LOCATING LUG M5 SCREW KEY HOLE

ig.059.rh
Figure 2-22 Installing the booster solar cover (GSM900 version shown)

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 241
GSM-209-423
Inst. 242
20th Sep 02
Chapter 3
BTS expansion

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423

i
31 31 31 31 32 32 35 35 35 36 37 38 38 39 310 311

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
iii
GSM-209-423
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure

About the procedure
This procedure provides instructions for expansion of the base transceiver station (BTS) site. The master BTS can be connected to either one slave BTS to provide a four carrier BTS site, or to two slave BTSs to provide six carriers. WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. Potentially lethal voltages, up to 240 V ac exist within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eye damage within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures. If fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
GSR5 or higher software must be loaded in both the master and slave BTS units of an expanded Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 configuration in order for the master/slave relationships to be established.
Master/slave establishment
The master downloads database information from the BSC and uses the CABINET (CAB) data to determine which CABs the user has defined to be present. The id of the CAB is related directly to the physical port the slave should be connected to (for example, CAB 1 0 0 is connected to fibre optic port 1 of the master), so from this data the master knows where it expects to have slaves connected. During the GSR5 boot process the slave BTS phase locks over the fibre optic cable and initiates contact with the master BTS. A signalling connection is established between master and slave, after which the required code objects are downloaded to the slave. The devices at the slave are then brought into service.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 31
GSM-209-423
Configuration of a BTS site

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 expansion installation is subject to the following rules:
S
The expansion BTS site must have one BTS configured as the master. The master BTS is connected to the BSC using an E1 link attached to the NIU. Additional BTSs at the BTS site are connected as slaves through the fibre optic link to the slave ports. NOTE The instruction label within the side panel (next to the fibre optic ports), states that both sets of fibre optic ports act as a master on the master BTS whilst only the bottom set of fibre optic ports is to be used on a slave BTS.
The maximum fibre length between the master BTS and a slave BTS is 1 km (lengths of 700 m to 800 m are not permitted). This limitation is required to allow synchronous handovers between the cells at the site. NOTE Motorola does not recommend using the Horizonmicro2 in an omni 6 site configuration unless the cell radius is small (in-building coverage required, for example). This is due to the very low Tx output power generated if six carriers are combined. Motorola recommends one antenna per site for Horizonmicro2 and two antennas per site for Horizoncompact2.
Connecting the BTSs

In order to cover most of the possibilities, it is assumed that a six carrier BTS site has been selected and the BTSs are positioned at the correct locations. Connections between the booster and the BTS (whether GSM900 or DCS1800) have been described in the previous chapter and are not described in this section. GSM900 BTSs can be mixed with DCS1800 BTSs. WARNING The system configuration must be star connected from the master to the two slaves, as in Figure 3-1. Daisy chaining, that is master-slave-slave, is not permitted.
Inst. 32
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Horizonmicro2 six carrier BTS

Figure 3-1 illustrates a six carrier Horizonmicro2 BTS site, where the three units are linked by fibre optic cables.
MASTER BTS
SLAVE BTS
SLAVE BTS
Figure 3-1 Six carrier Horizonmicro2 BTS site

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 33
GSM-209-423
Horizoncompact2 six carrier BTS

Figure 3-2 illustrates a six carrier Horizoncompact2 BTS site, where the three units are linked by fibre optic cables.
BOOSTER
BOOSTER
BOOSTER MASTER BTS

(GSM900 OR DCS1800) FIBRE OPTIC LINKS
SLAVE BTS
(GSM900 OR DCS1800)
SLAVE BTS
(GSM900 OR DCS1800)
Figure 3-2 Six carrier Horizoncompact2 BTS site with boosters
Inst. 34
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Installing the expansion fibre optic cabling

S S
Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket to fit a tamperproof T25 tool bit. Torque wrench.

The preferred method of access for Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment fitted above ground/floor level is via a hydraulic lift. Scaffolding or ladders can be used if appropriate or if a hydraulic lift is not available. NOTE Exercise great care when utilizing hydraulic lifting gear and observe all instruction and safety precautions. If the installation is being carried out in a public area, a suitable area around the site of the installation must be cordoned off to prevent members of the public accessing the site. If possible, a third member of the installation team should be stationed at the site to ensure that the designated site area is not accessed by members of the public.
To access the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment using a hydraulic lift: 1. 2. Collect the necessary tools and equipment, and enter the cage of the hydraulic lift. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 35
GSM-209-423
Removing the front solar covers

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. Potentially lethal voltages, up to 240 V ac exist within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eye damage within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures. If fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
If the front solar covers are fitted then: 1. 2. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws that clamp the solar cover to the chassis from the bottom of the solar cover. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs. CAUTION 3. Avoid dropping or placing anything on top of the solar cover, as it is susceptible to damage.
Remove the solar cover and put in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
Figure 3-3 shows the removal of the BTS solar cover from the chassis.
Figure 3-3 Removing the BTS solar cover

Inst. 36
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Removing the side and inner covers

To remove the BTS side cover and inner cover: WARNING Power to the transceivers must be turned OFF, while connections are made to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. This is a precaution to minimize RF exposure from the antenna. Potentially lethal voltages, up to 240 V ac exist within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eye damage within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures. If fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
1. 2.
Remove the pin from the outer plastic side cover and then push back the cover to remove. Retain the pin for securing the expansion cover. Remove the four M5 screws securing the inner metal cover and then remove the cover.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 37
Connecting the fibre optic cables
GSM-209-423

Introduction
The expansion casting is supplied with fibre connectors already installed. The following text describes the procedure for installing the casting. Figure 3-4 shows the expansion casting with fibre connectors already installed.
Rx2 Tx2 Rx1 PORT 2 PORT 1 Tx1
Figure 3-4 Expansion casting with fibre optic connectors installed
Inst. 38
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Connecting the fibre optic links to the master BTS

Proceed as follows to install the expansion casting and connect the fibre optic links (see also Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5) : WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. Potentially lethal voltages, up to 240 V ac exist within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eye damage within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures. If fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
1.
Locate the four optical fibre plugs on the expansion casting into the four sockets on the master BTS. The sockets have a plastic guide plate to ensure correct alignment. Secure the expansion casting to the BTS with four screws and tighten to 3.4 Nm torque. NOTE On early versions, remove the fibre protection caps before connection. The plastic guide fitted in the BTS(s) to ensure correct alignment of the fibre connectors may not be present take care to fit the connectors correctly.
2.
Connect the fibre optic link cable to the first slave BTS to port 1 on the master BTS. The connector is a bayonet type. Insert the plug into the socket and turn to lock into position. Connect the fibre optic link cable to the second slave BTS (if fitted) to port 2 on the master BTS. Place the expansion cover bottom locating lugs in the fixing positions and then push the unit forward to its fixing position. Secure the expansion cover to the BTS chassis with the retaining pin.
3. 4.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 39
GSM-209-423
Connecting the fibre optic links to the slave BTS

1. Locate the four optical fibre plugs on the expansion casting into the four sockets on the slave BTS(s). The sockets have a plastic guide plate to ensure correct alignment. Secure expansion casting to the BTS with four screws and tighten to 3.4 Nm torque. CAUTION 2. 3. Do not allow the expansion casting to hang from the fibre optic cable.
Connect the fibre optic link cable to the master BTS to port 1 on the slave BTS. Place the expansion cover bottom locating lugs in the fixing positions and then push the unit forward to its fixing position. Secure the expansion cover to the BTS chassis with the retaining pin.
Figure 3-5 shows the master and slave BTS interconnections.

MASTER BTS
PORT 2
PORT 1
1st SLAVE BTS
2nd SLAVE BTS

FIBRE OPTIC LINKS
PORT 1 PORT 1 FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTIONS
Figure 3-5 Master and slave BTS fibre optic interconnections

Inst. 310
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Refitting the BTS solar covers

WARNING Power to the transceivers must be turned OFF, while connections are made to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. This is a precaution to minimize RF exposure from the antenna. Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eye damage within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures. If fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
To refit each solar cover: 1. 2. 3. Refit the solar cover onto the top chassis locating lugs. Ensure the solar cover attaches onto the bottom securing lugs. Tighten the two M5 tamperproof screws to the bottom of the solar cover, applying the correct torque.
Figure 3-6 shows the solar cover being refitted.
ig.056.rh
Figure 3-6 Refitting the solar cover

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 311
GSM-209-423
Inst. 312
20th Sep 02
Chapter 4
Commissioning

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 41 Commissioning overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 41 Pre power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the system visually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering up the BTS and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for powering up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 42 42 42 43 44 44 45 47 48

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
iii
GSM-209-423
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Commissioning
Commissioning
Commissioning overview
This chapter provides information required for the commissioning of a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS. Before starting commissioning, the site should be prepared and the equipment installed as described in this service manual and the site specific documentation. NOTE If the E1 link is not active when the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 is commissioned it will not be possible to download code directly from the BSC.
Commissioning a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 consists of the sections listed in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Commissioning overview
Section Test equipment & test leads. Pre-power up checks. Powering up the equipment. Battery backup check. NOTE
Description Describes the equipment required to perform commissioning. Steps to perform before powering up the system. Describes the correct power up sequence. Stipulates how, and under what conditions, a battery check can be performed.
After power up, automatic OMC-R procedures are used for code download and configuration. Thus there is no requirement for intervention after power up. Equipment does not include a battery charger.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 41
Pre power up checks
GSM-209-423
Pre power up checks

Introduction
WARNING Before powering up the equipment, the power system checks provided in this section must be performed. Only insulated tools should be used when working on the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 power system.
This section contains procedures for testing the power system prior to applying power to a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure. CAUTION This equipment contains CMOS devices and is vulnerable to static discharge. Although the damage may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to mishandling causing barrier breakdown.
Earth continuity checks

Before proceeding with the earth continuity checks, ensure the system main earth to the site connections are in place and secure. Check that the resistance of the test equipment leads is less than 0.05 Ohms.
Inst. 42
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Pre power up checks
Inspecting the system visually

Inspect the installation for damage in accordance with BS 7671 (16th Edition <Section 711, 712 and 713>) or the IEC Wiring regulations equivalent. WARNING If damage is discovered during the visual inspection, do not proceed with commissioning until the damage has been inspected and rectified by the manufacturers or their representatives.
Equipment interior and exterior

Examine the exterior of the enclosure for structural, paint or mechanical damage and report any damage to Motorola for repair.
Power system
Visually examine the power system for mechanical damage and report any damage to Motorola for repair. To perform a visual inspection of the power systems: WARNING Potential lethal voltages up to 240 V ac, and high energy sources are present within the BTS when the ac supply isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or the battery is connected. Ensure the main ac power isolator is in the OFF position before proceeding.
1. 2.
Check system earth connections for tightness and cable/strap damage. Check the protective earth to the BTS PSM and booster.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 43
Powering up the BTS and booster
GSM-209-423

Preparation for powering up the equipment
This section provides the procedure to be followed when initially powering up a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure and Horizoncompact2 booster. WARNING Before powering up the equipment, the power system checks provided in Pre power up checks must be performed. Only insulated tools should be used when working on the power system. When the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 has been powered up, it must not be powered down until the complete software download has finished. This is because powering down of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 could interfere with automatic software loading which takes place at commissioning. Such interference could cause an equipment software failure, requiring specialist repair procedures.
CAUTION
Inst. 44
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Powering up the equipment

WARNING The Horizonmicro2 enclosure, the Horizoncompact2 enclosure and the Horizoncompact2 booster do not have individual ac power switches and are therefore live when the ac power isolator switch is turned on.
Horizonmicro2 power up procedure

1. 2. 3. 4. Ensure that the 20 A blade fuse on the battery has been visually inspected, and correctly inserted. Operate the ac power isolator on the master BTS to switch on the ac supply to the Horizonmicro2 PSM. Repeat the procedure to power up the slave BTS(s), if fitted. Contact the OMC-R to verify that communication has been established with the site.
Horizoncompact2 power up procedure

1. 2. 3. 4. Ensure that the 20 A blade fuse on the battery has been visually inspected, and correctly inserted. Operate the ac power isolator on the master BTS to switch on the ac supply to the Horizoncompact2 PSM. Repeat the procedure to power up the slave BTS(s), if fitted. Starting with the master BTS, then the slave BTS(s), remove the booster(s) solar cover(s) (see Chapter 2), ensuring that the indicator(s) is/are fitted. See Figure 4-1 (GSM900 version) or Figure 4-2 (DCS1800 version). Operate the ac power isolator to switch on the ac supply to the booster(s). NOTE An alarm indicator is temporarily fitted to the booster to provide a visual indication of power to the unit.
If the indicator is illuminated, follow steps 5 to 9 (see also Warning and Caution in the previous section). If the indicator is not illuminated, check the mains cable and connectors. If the problem persists then the booster unit is faulty and needs to be replaced. Notify the OMC-R and do not try to commission the Horizoncompact2. Close down the site until a new Horizoncompact2 booster is delivered. WARNING Ensure the ac supply input has been safely isolated, so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached. The other end of the alarms cable must be fitted to the customer interface sealing assembly and plugged in to the Horizoncompact2 (see Figure 2-10 in Chapter 2 of this category).
CAUTION

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 45
GSM-209-423
5.
Disconnect the alarms indicator and fit the alarms connector to the Horizoncompact2 booster. NOTE Ensure the other end of the alarms cable is connected to the Horizoncompact2 (see Chapter 2 of this category).
6.
Release the two M8 bolts secured to the booster backplate. Slide the security plate up into position, refit the two M8 security bolts and tighten to the recommended torque. Insert in turn an M8 x 16 screw at each edge fixing position of the security bracket, then insert the blade of a screwdriver through the outer security bracket hole to reach the screw head inside, as shown in Figure 4-1 (GSM900 version) or Figure 4-2 (DCS1800 version). Finally, tighten the screws to secure the bracket. Refit the booster solar cover(s) (see Chapter 2 of this category). Contact the OMC-R to verify that communication has been established with the site.
7.
8. 9.
Inst. 46
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
GSM900 booster view

Figure 4-1 are external views of the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster unit showing the alarms connection.
ALARMS CONNECTOR
INDICATOR
BACKPLATE SCREW POSITIONS (M8 x 16)
SECURITY BRACKET
SCREWDRIVER
Figure 4-1 Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster unit showing the alarms connection
20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 47
GSM-209-423
DCS1800 booster view

Figure 4-2 are external views of the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster unit showing the alarms connection.
ALARMS CONNECTOR
INDICATOR
BACKPLATE
SECURITY BRACKET
SCREWDRIVER
Figure 4-2 Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster unit showing the alarms connection
Inst. 48
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Battery check
Battery check
Introduction to the battery check
The objective of the battery check is to verify the serviceability of the battery in the event of an ac supply failure. NOTE Before performing the battery test it is imperative that the battery is fully charged. The battery takes a minimum of 12 hours to fully charge. The battery is of the sealed type and never needs any maintenance. Expected life of the battery is approximately five years. Equipment does not include a battery charger. The battery check must NOT be performed until the complete software download is finished. This is because the battery is unlikely to be fully charged, and powering down of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 could possibly interfere with automatic software loading. Such interference could create an equipment software failure requiring specialist repair procedures.
CAUTION
Battery test
To test the battery proceed as follows:
S S
Ensure that all transceiver channels are unlocked and busy by asking the OMC-R to check the state of the site. Switch off the ac supply at the ac power isolator. NOTE The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures do not have an ac power isolator switch.
S S S
Confirm that the OMC-R receives an ac fail alarm. Confirm with the OMC-R that the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 still operates correctly on battery power. Switch on the ac supply at the ac power isolator switch. CAUTION Leaving power off for more than five minutes could result in the OMC-R receiving a Low Voltage Disconnect Imminent alarm, and then the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 unit may shut down, causing loss of service.
S S S
Confirm that the OMC-R receives an alarm clear message. This completes the test. Inform the OMC-R of test completion.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 49
Battery check
GSM-209-423
Inst. 410
20th Sep 02
Chapter 5
Decommissioning the equipment

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
GSM-209-423
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Overview of decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51 Decommissioning the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decommissioning a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 52 52 52 53 56 57 57 57 57 510

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
iii
GSM-209-423
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Overview of decommissioning
Overview of decommissioning
Introduction
This chapter describes how to decommission a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure and the Horizoncompact2 booster (this involves the complete removal of all equipment and cables from the site). To decommission equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example E1 Links, power supplies and antenna, refer to the vendors instructions. WARNING Hazardous voltages in excess of 240 V ac exist inside a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure with a booster unit. Under no circumstances should BTSs be packaged with the battery pack attached. If the battery pack is damaged, the loose battery cells present a potential safety hazard.
Prerequisite
Read Chapter 1 of this category in order to acquire essential background information before attempting to decommission a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 51
Decommissioning the BTS enclosure
GSM-209-423

Introduction
Use the following procedure to decommission a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure, and use the checklist to check off each action as it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as often as required; do not write on the original.
Before starting
Before starting to decommission a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure ensure that:
S S
The shipping container exists. Contact the Motorola local office for a new container if the original shipping container has been disposed of. Correct packaging exists: cartons A, B, C, and if applicable, the fibre optic carton. Contact the Motorola local office for new packaging if the original cartons have been disposed of. The main ac power source is switched off and that NO power is connected to the equipment. WARNING Ensure that there is no risk of power being applied to the equipment during decommissioning. The ac power source should be isolated and locked, and a warning label attached.
The carrying/lifting handles have been retrieved from storage.
Inst. 52
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Procedure
To decommission a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure, carry out the procedures outlined below in sequence.
Preliminary actions
1. 2. Check the enclosure for signs of damage. Ensure that the ac supply is disconnected from the equipment at the isolator switch.
Solar cover removal

1. Remove the solar cover by following steps a and b. Step a. b. 2. Action Release the two M5 security screws, clamping the solar cover to the chassis, from bottom of the solar cover. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis, and upwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs.
Carefully pack the solar cover in carton B.
Battery/cover removal
1. Remove the battery/cover by following steps by following steps c and d. Step c. d. Action Release the two retaining screws and remove the battery/cover from the underside of the chassis. If a battery is fitted, remove the blade fuse from the battery. Do not dispose of the battery.
CAUTION 2.
Carefully pack the cover/battery and blade fuse in carton B. WARNING Under no circumstances should BTSs be packaged with the battery pack attached. If the battery pack is damaged, the loose battery cells present a potential safety hazard. The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures use circuitry which is sensitive to static discharge. Avoid handling in a high-static environment. When handling the chassis, do not touch connector contacts. An earthed high-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handling the chassis with the bottom cover removed.
CAUTION

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 53
GSM-209-423
Cable removal
1. Disconnect the ac input power cable, RF booster cables, E1/HDSL links and earth strap/cable and, if applicable, fibre optical cables by using the following table. If it is... AC power Then... Disconnect the socket from the PSM by releasing the captive screw and pulling, using the connector body. Release the power cable from the cable clips and insulate. Disconnect the N-type antenna plug from the antenna connector mounted in the centre of the chassis. Remove cable clamp components and disconnect the connections from the DINO or RHINO. module: a: If the module is a RHINO then release the Type 43 connectors. b: If the module is a DINO then release the two retaining screws and remove the 9-way D-type connector. c: Remove any HDSL connectors. Safely detach the cable clamp from the cable, and store safely, then release the cable(s). Disconnect the alarm cable socket and customer interface assembly. Remove the nut, spring and plain washers and disconnect the earth strap from the wall mounting bracket. Disconnect the main earth cable from the wall bracket. Release the expansion cover and expansion castings and disconnect the fibre optic cables from the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. Refit the expansion casting and expansion cover and repack the fibre optic cables in its carton.
Booster cables (Horizoncompact2) E1/HDSL links
Alarm cable Earth strap
Wall bracket earth Fibre optic cables (if applicable)
WARNING
Insulate and stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute a hazard to personnel using the site.
2. 3.
Ensure that all disconnected cables are clear of the enclosure. If the power cable is not to be used again for another item of equipment, remove completely and dispose of safely.
Inst. 54
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
BTS chassis and wall bracket removal

1. Remove the BTS chassis by following steps e to h. WARNING The BTS chassis can weigh up to 24 kg. Handle with extreme caution. Action Remove the short M8 bolt that secures the bottom of the chassis to the wall bracket. Locate and fit the previously stored carrying/lifting handles to the sides/front of the chassis with six M6 screws. Remove the two long M8 bolts that secure the top of the chassis to the top of the wall bracket. Using the carrying/lifting handles, lift and pull the chassis away from the wall bracket.
Step e. f. g. h.
2. 3.
Carefully pack the chassis in carton C. Remove the wall bracket by referring to the following table. If it is ... Wall mounted Then ... Holding the wall bracket and using a suitable tool, remove the four screws securing the wall bracket to the wall. Using suitable tools, cut and remove the lower bucklestrap from the pole. Holding the wall bracket and using the above procedure, remove the upper bucklestrap from the pole. Remove the wall bracket from the pole. Remove the two C channels from the wall bracket. Remove the two universal channel clamps from the C channels.
Pole mounted
4. 5. 6.
If fitted, remove the conduit termination bracket from both the conduits and wall bracket. Carefully pack the wall bracket in carton A. Carefully pack all security and fixing screws, nuts and washers, together with the conduit termination bracket, two C channels, universal channel clamps and bucklestraps, in carton A. Carefully pack cartons C, B and A in the shipping container. Seal the container and return, as advised by the Motorola in-country Project Manager.
7.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 55
GSM-209-423
BTS checklist
Copy this sheet and fill in the checklist in Table 5-1. ENGINEERS NAME __________________________________DATE _______ SIGNATURE ________________________________________ SITE NAME _________________________________________ EQUIPMENT TYPE ___________________________________ NAT ID _____________________________________________
Table 5-1 Checklist of completed decommissioning steps (BTS)
ACTION BTS enclosure decommissioned. Packing material (including polythene bag) on site. Is enclosure damaged? If yes detail in comments box. Solar cover removed and packed. Battery removed and packed. AC power cable disconnected from ac-dc PSM. DINO or RHINO cables disconnected. Remote antenna disconnected (if fitted). Chassis earth strap disconnected from wall bracket. Main earth cable disconnected from wall bracket. BTS chassis removed and packed. Wall bracket removed and packed. Wall bracket fixings removed and packed. Conduit termination bracket (if fitted) removed and packed. All loose cables stowed and secured. AC supply input isolated and source locked. Fibre optic cables packed (if applicable). COMMENTS
Yes
No
N/A
Inst. 56
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Decommissioning a booster
Introduction
Use the following procedure to decommission a booster and use the checklist to check off each action as it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as often as required; do not write on the original.
Before starting
Before starting to decommission a booster ensure that:
S S S
The shipping container exists. Contact the Motorola local office for a new container if the original shipping container has been disposed of. Correct packaging exists: cartons A, B and C. Contact the Motorola local office for new packaging if the original cartons have been disposed of. The main power source is switched off and that NO power is connected to the booster. WARNING Ensure that there is no risk of power being applied to the equipment during decommissioning. The ac power source should be isolated and locked, and a warning label attached.
S S
Sufficient packing cartons are available to pack the decommissioned equipment. The carrying/lifting handles have been retrieved from storage.
Procedure
To decommission a booster, carry out the procedures outlined below in sequence:
Preliminary actions
1. 2. Check the booster for signs of damage. Ensure that the ac supply is disconnected from the booster at the isolator switch.
Solar cover removal

1. Remove the solar cover by following steps a and b. Step a. b. 2. Action Release the two M5 security screws that clamp the solar booster cover to the chassis from the bottom of the solar cover. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs.
Carefully pack the booster solar cover in carton B.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 57
GSM-209-423
Cable removal
CAUTION A booster uses circuitry which is sensitive to static discharge. Avoid handling in a high static environment. When handling the chassis, do not touch connector contacts.
1.
Disconnect the ac input power cable and earth strap/cable and then follow the steps given in the following table table. To remove the... Security bracket AC power and alarms cable clamp AC power Then... Remove the screws and disconnect the clamp. Remove the screws and release the cable clamp. Release the cables and refit the cable clamp. Disconnect the socket from the PSM by releasing the captive screw and pulling, using the connector body. Release the power cable from the cable clips. Insulate the cable. Disconnect the alarms cable socket and insulate. Disconnect the antenna plugs ANT1 and ANT2 from the sockets. Disconnect the Tx and Rx plugs from the sockets. Remove the nut, spring and plain washers and disconnect the earth strap from the wall mounting bracket. Disconnect the main earth cable from the wall bracket.
Alarms cable Antenna plugs Tx and Rx plugs Earth strap
Wall bracket earth
WARNING
Insulate and stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute a hazard to personnel using the site.
2. 3.
Ensure that all disconnected cables are clear of the booster. If the power cable is not to be used again for another item of equipment, remove completely and dispose of safely.
Inst. 58
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-423
Booster chassis and wall bracket removal

WARNING The booster chassis can weight up to 20 kg (GSM900) or 24 kg (DCS1800). Handle with extreme care.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Remove the four long M8 screws and washers securing the chassis to the wall bracket. Using the same four screws and washers, locate and fit the previously stored carrying/lifting handles to each side of the chassis. Using the carrying/lifting handles lift and pull the chassis away from the wall bracket. Carefully pack the chassis in carton C. If wall bracket antennas are fitted, cut the cable ties and remove the cable assemblies. Remove the wall bracket by referring to the following table. If it is ... Wall mounted Then ... Holding the wall bracket and using a suitable tool, remove the four screws securing the wall bracket to the wall. Using suitable tools, cut and remove the lower bucklestrap from the pole. Holding the wall bracket and using the above procedure, remove the upper bucklestrap from the pole. Remove the wall bracket from the pole. Remove the two C channels from the wall bracket. Remove the two universal channel clamps from the C channels.
Pole mounted
7. 8.
Carefully pack the wall bracket in carton A. Carefully pack all security and fixing screws, nuts, washers together with the conduit termination bracket, two C channels, universal channel clamps and bucklestraps in carton A. Carefully pack cartons A, B and C in the shipping container. Seal the container and return, as advised by the Motorola in-country Project Manager.
9.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W63-O
Inst. 59
GSM-209-423
Booster checklist
Copy this sheet and fill in the checklist in Table 5-2. ENGINEERS NAME __________________________________DATE _______ SIGNATURE ________________________________________ SITE NAME _________________________________________ EQUIPMENT TYPE ___________________________________ NAT ID _____________________________________________
Table 5-2 Checklist of completed decommissioning steps (Booster)
ACTION Horizoncompact2 booster decommissioned. Packing material (including polythene bag) on site. Is enclosure damaged? If yes detail in comments box. Booster solar cover removed and packed. AC power cable disconnected from ac-dc PSM. Antenna plugs removed. Tx1, Tx2 and Rx plugs removed. Alarm cable removed. Chassis earth strap disconnected from wall bracket. Main earth cable disconnected from wall bracket. Security bracket removed and packed. Booster chassis removed and packed. Wall bracket removed and packed. Wall bracket fixings removed and packed. Conduit termination bracket (if fitted) removed and packed. All loose cables stowed and secured. AC supply input isolated and source locked. COMMENTS
Yes
No
N/A
Inst. 510
20th Sep 02
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER 2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 3 FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
Category 523
Maintenance Information (Maint.)
Maintenance Information: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
GSM-209-523
ii
Maintenance Information: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W64-O
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Category 523 Maintenance Information (Maint.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i i
11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 14

Routine maintenance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of BTS enclosure and solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annual routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint.
i
21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 23 23 24 24 24 25 26 27 27 27 27

Fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference to fault diagnosis information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
i
Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. 31 31 32 32 32 32
68P02902W64-O
iii
GSM-209-523
Replacing the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing a BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cable positions diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint.
33 33 33 33 34 35 35 37 39 39
Replacing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 310 Solar cover replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 310 Solar cover attachment diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 311 Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 312 Battery replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 312 Battery attachment diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 313 Replacing customer interface clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS connectors location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer interface clamp diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster disconnection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster cable locations diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster cable locations diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. 314 314 315 315 316 317 317 317 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324
Replacing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 325 Solar cover replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 325 Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cable removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cable replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Horizoncompact2 antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint.
326 326 326 326 327 327 328 329 329 329 329 330 330
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
GSM-209-523
vi
20th Sep 02
Chapter 1
General information

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
GSM-209-523
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Chapter 1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 14

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
iii
GSM-209-523
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Introduction to maintenance
Introduction to maintenance
Recommended conditions and requirements
This chapter contains the recommended conditions and requirements that should be considered before any of the procedures included in this document, or referred to in other documents, are carried out on the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment.
In this chapter
The conditions and requirements to be considered are:
S S S S
Equipment access. Tools and materials. Torque values. Test equipment and leads.
Safety
Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially lethal hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within these maintenance procedures, and the preliminary pages of this manual, must be adhered to when working on the equipment.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 11
Equipment access
GSM-209-523
Equipment access
Introduction to equipment access
The following information describes the environmental requirements that should be considered before attempting to gain access to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment.
Environmental requirements
The environmental limits for equipment operation and maintenance activity are defined in Technical Description: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 (Category 323) of this service manual.
Maintenance conditions
WARNING Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment may be hot to touch.
Maintenance procedures depend on the ambient conditions. Access to Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment in the open air must not be attempted during the following actual or imminent inclement weather conditions:
S S S
Winds in excess of 25 knots. Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail, or sleet. During an electrical storm.
Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment may be accessed under the following conditions:
S S S
Wind speeds of less than 25 knots. No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period. When the temperature is between 40 _C to +50 _C.
Access to a wall mounted BTS and booster

A hydraulic lift/ladders must be used to gain access to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 for repair and routine maintenance.
Maint. 12
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Tools and materials
Tools and materials

Introduction to tools and materials
The following table lists the recommended tools and materials for carrying out the procedures in this manual.
BTS and booster tool kit

A recommended tool kit for the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 is listed in Table 1-1. Table 1-1 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tool kit Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description 13 mm combination spanner. Screwdriver set, flats and posidrive. 1/4 inch square drive. 1/4 inch extension. 1/4 inch to hex adapter. T10 bit. T25 tamperproof bit (supplied). T30 tamperproof bit (supplied). 6 mm hex bit. Hammer drill plus masonry bits. Roll of insulation tape. Spirit level. Ratchet & sockets. Torque wrench. Ruler. Hammer. Pole mount banding tool (order number SWLN4847). Wire stripping tool. Crimping tool. Small hacksaw.
Cleaning equipment
The following cleaning materials and equipment are required for routine maintenance:
S S S S S
Soft brush. Dustpan. Mild detergent. De-ionised water Soft cloth.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 13
Tools and materials
GSM-209-523
Torque values
The torque values listed in Table 1-2 are to be used when performing maintenance on the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment. Table 1-2 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 torque values Item Chassis/wall bracket earth stud (BTS and booster) Wall bracket/wall fixings BTS conduit bracket Booster conduit bracket BTS chassis Chassis earth stud Customer interface cover (clamp) Sealant cover Strain relief clamp Battery/Battery cover Expansion casting Chassis/wall bracket Transport handle BTS cover Solar cover/chassis Booster chassis Chassis earth stud Security bracket Chassis/wall bracket Transport handle Booster cover Solar cover/chassis Fibre optic expansion Expansion casting Fibre cable M5 Torx M5 Torx 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm Field only Field only M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only M8 nut M8 skt hd M8 skt hd M8 skt hd 10 Nm 10 Nm 10 Nm 10 Nm Field only Field only Field only Factory & field M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only M8 nut M5 Torx M5 Torx M3 Torx M5 Torx M5 Torx M8 skt hd M6 Torx 10 Nm 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm 1.2 Nm 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm 10 Nm 3.4 Nm Field only Field only Field only Field only Field only Field only Field only Factory & field Size/Type M8 nut Torque 10 Nm Where Factory & field Field only Factory & field Factory & field Wall bracket (BTS and booster)
Customer selection M6 skt hd M8 skt hd 3.4 Nm 10 Nm
Maint. 14
20th Sep 02
Chapter 2
Routine maintenance

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
GSM-209-523
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523

Routine maintenance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of BTS enclosure and solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annual routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint.
i
21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 23 23 24 24 24 25 26 27 27 27 27

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
iii
GSM-209-523
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Routine maintenance overview
Routine maintenance overview

Introduction to routine maintenance
This chapter provides the information required to perform the routine maintenance on a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure and Horizoncompact2 booster. NOTE Since the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 operate as part of a network, the procedures in this manual must be carried out in conjunction with the relevant network procedures performed at the OMC-R.
Maintenance procedures
The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 routine maintenance procedures which should be performed annually are:
S S S S S
Checking fins and grilles. Checking bolts and nuts. Checking the solar cover(s). Checking paintwork. Checking the security of attachment.
Torque values
For torque values used during the performance of routine maintenance on Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment, refer to Chapter 1, Tools and materials.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 21
Removing the BTS solar cover
GSM-209-523

Introduction to removing the BTS solar cover
This procedure describes how to remove the solar cover to gain access to internal components, and how to refit it when maintenance has been completed. WARNING Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosure can cause eye damage. If fibre optic cables are fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed. Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 for the conditions that must be considered before gaining access to internal equipment.
CAUTION
Tools required
The tools specifically required for this procedure are:
S S
T25 tamperproof bit. Torque wrench.

To remove the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 solar cover: 1. 2. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws that clamp the solar cover to the chassis from the bottom of the solar cover. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs. CAUTION 3. The solar cover is susceptible to damage. Avoid dropping or placing anything on top of it.
Maint. 22
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Diagram of BTS enclosure and solar cover

Figure 2-1 shows the removal of the solar cover from the chassis.
SOLAR COVER
ig.056.rh
Refitting the BTS solar cover

WARNING Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure can cause eye damage. If fibre optic cables are fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
To refit the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS solar cover: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Position the solar cover over the chassis. Lift the solar cover slightly above the top of the chassis, and aligned with the sides of the rear cover. Slightly angle the top of the solar cover, push towards the chassis and downwards, until it is positioned on the chassis top locating lugs. Ensure that the solar cover has located on the bottom securing lugs and is flush with the back cover. Secure the solar cover to the chassis by tightening the two M5 tamperproof screws evenly to the correct torque.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 23
Removing the booster solar cover
GSM-209-523

Introduction to removing the booster solar cover
This procedure describes how to remove the solar cover to gain access to internal components, and how to refit it when maintenance has been completed. NOTE Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 for the conditions that must be considered before gaining access to internal equipment.
Tools required
The tools specifically required for this procedure are:
S S
T25 tamperproof bit. Torque wrench.
Maint. 24
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523

To remove the booster solar cover: 1. 2. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws that secure the solar cover to the chassis from the bottom of the solar cover. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs. CAUTION 3. The solar cover is susceptible to damage. Avoid dropping or placing anything on it.
Remove the solar cover and put in a safe place where it will not be damaged. NOTE Inspect the solar cover. If it is damaged, a new cover should be ordered.
Figure 2-2 shows the location of the solar cover on the chassis.
SOLAR COVER LOCATING LUG M5 SCREW KEY HOLE

ig.059.rh
Figure 2-2 Removing the booster solar cover (GSM900 version shown)

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 25
GSM-209-523
Refitting the booster solar cover

To fit the booster solar cover to the chassis: 1. Ensure that the two M5 tamperproof screws on the lower front cover brackets of the booster are released to fit the security bracket key slot hole, as shown in Figure 2-2. Place the solar cover onto the booster mounting bolts by tilting the lower cover and pushing into the key hole position, then push forward to secure. Securing the cover by tightening the M5 security screws evenly to the specified torque.
2. 3.
Maint. 26
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Annual routine maintenance

Maintenance overview
This section describes the annual routine maintenance procedures which should be performed in the sequence given.
Cleaning equipment
Refer to Chapter 1 Tools and materials for details of the cleaning materials required.
Maintenance procedure
Remove the BTS or booster solar cover as described earlier in this chapter, then proceed as follows:
Fins and grilles

Use a soft brush and dustpan to remove all the dirt and debris from the finned surfaces and grilles of the equipment.
Bolts and nuts

For all equipment, check all visible nuts, bolts, screws and connections for security of attachment; refer to the torque tables in Chapter 1.
Solar covers
Clean the solar cover(s) using a leather cloth, mild detergent and water to remove any grease, salt or bird lime.
Paint
Check paintwork and repaint if necessary.
Security attachment
Check security attachment and repair if necessary. Refit the solar cover(s).
Residual current device (RCD)

Check RCD to national and manufacturer recommended instructions.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 27
GSM-209-523
Maint. 28
20th Sep 02
Chapter 3
Fault diagnosis and repair

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
GSM-209-523
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523

Fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference to fault diagnosis information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing a BTS enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cable positions diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the BTS solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover attachment diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery attachment diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing customer interface clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS connectors location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer interface clamp diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing a booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster disconnection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster cable locations diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster cable locations diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the booster solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cable removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cable replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20th Sep 02
i
Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. 31 31 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 34 35 35 37 39 39 310 310 311 312 312 313 314 314 315 315 316 317 317 317 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 325 326 326 326 326 327 327 328
68P02902W64-O
iii
GSM-209-523
Replacing Horizoncompact2 antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint.
329 329 329 329 330 330
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Fault diagnosis
Fault diagnosis
Reference to fault diagnosis information
There are no fault diagnosis procedures for the Horizonmicro2 or the Horizoncompact2 described in this service manual. Instead, reference should be made to the following manuals:
S S
Maintenance Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting (GSM 100-523). Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-R (GSM 100-501).

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 31
Overview of replacement procedures
GSM-209-523
Overview of replacement procedures

Introduction to repair
This chapter provides the repair procedures for Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment. The following procedures are described:
S S
Replacement of field replaceable units (FRUs). Calibration of the MCU-m GCLK.
FRU list
Horizonmicro2
The Horizonmicro2 FRUs are:
S S S S S S S
BTS enclosure complete. BTS solar cover. Battery pack. Customer interface clamp. Wall/pole mounting brackets and fixings. Internal antenna. Fibre optic cables and connection covers (if applicable).
Horizoncompact2
The Horizoncompact2 FRUs are:
S S S S S S S S S
BTS enclosure complete. BTS solar cover. Battery pack. Customer interface clamp. Horizoncompact2 booster unit complete. Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover. Cables (Horizoncompact2 BTS to Horizoncompact2 booster and wall bracket to antenna). Wall/pole mounting brackets and fixings. Fibre optic cables and connection covers (if applicable).
Torque values
Refer to Chapter 1 of this category for torque values used in the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 repair procedures.
Maint. 32
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Replacing the BTS enclosure

Introduction to replacing a BTS enclosure
This procedure describes how to remove the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS and replace it with a new unit. CAUTION Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 for the conditions that must be considered before gaining access to internal equipment.
Tools required
The tools specifically required for these procedures are:
S S S S S S S
Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket. 6 mm hex bit. T25 tamperproof bit. T10 bit. Extension 1/4 inch to hex adapter. Screwdriver. Hydraulic lift.
Removal procedures
Before the equipment is removed from the bracket the following procedures must be performed:
S S S
Solar cover removal. Battery disconnection. Cable disconnection.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 33
GSM-209-523
Solar cover removal

WARNING Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTS enclosure can cause eye damage. If fibre optic cables are fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
To remove the solar cover: 1. 2. 3. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to the BTS chassis. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws that clamp the solar cover to the chassis from the bottom of the solar cover. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs. CAUTION 4. Avoid dropping or placing anything on top of the solar cover, as it is susceptible to damage.
Figure 3-1 shows the removal of the BTS solar cover from the chassis.
ig.056.rh
Maint. 34
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Battery removal procedure

To remove the bottom cover containing the battery: WARNING Support the battery while removing the screws to avoid personnel being placed at risk when battery detaches from the chassis.
1. 2.
Release the two M5 captive screws that secure the battery cover to the bottom of the chassis. Carefully remove the battery cover and battery (see also Replacing the battery).
Cable disconnection
With reference to Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3, disconnect the following cables:
AC power
WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolated so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked, and a warning label attached.
Disconnect the ac power connector from the ac-dc PSM by releasing the central screw and pulling on the connector body.
External antenna (Horizonmicro2)

NOTE This procedure is not required if the Horizonmicro2 uses an internal antenna option.
Disconnect the N-type antenna plug from the antenna connector mounted on the centre front right of the chassis (see Figure 3-2).
External antennas (Horizoncompact2)

Disconnect the N-type Rx and Tx plugs from their respective connectors mounted at the centre front of the chassis (see Figure 3-3). NOTE For fibre optic cable disconnection see Replacing the expansion fibre optic cables.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 35
GSM-209-523
E1/HDSL link
Unscrew the clamp cover, cable clamp and clamp main body. Disconnect the connections from the DINO or RHINO module using the following appropriate procedure: If the module is ... RHINO DINO (E1) Then ... Release the type T43 connectors. Release the HDSL connector(s). Release the two retaining screws and remove the 9-way D-type connector. Release the HDSL connector(s).
Store the clamp components safely for re-use. NOTE If clamp seals are damaged, the clamp should be replaced.
Alarms cable
Release the alarms cable (connecting with the booster unit) from the socket by unscrewing the plug (see Figure 3-3 for position).
Earth cable
Remove the nut, spring and plain washers and disconnect the earth cable from the wall mounting bracket.
Maint. 36
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
BTS cable positions diagram

Horizonmicro2
Figure 3-2 shows the cable connections to the Horizonmicro2.
GASKET NOTE: ENSURE SEALED RIGHT ANGLED CONNECTOR HUBER & SUHNER PART NO. 16N-50-3-33-133IP AC INPUT CONNECTOR
FRONT VIEW
RDIS MODULE DTRX MODULE NOT USED
Rx/Tx1/Tx2 CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type)
Figure 3-2 View of front and bottom of Horizonmicro2 chassis, showing cable connectors
20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 37
GSM-209-523
Horizoncompact2
Figure 3-3 shows the cable connections to the Horizoncompact2.
GASKET NOTE: ENSURE SEALED RIGHT ANGLED CONNECTOR HUBER & SUHNER PART NO. 16N-50-3-33-133IP AC INPUT CONNECTOR AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
FRONT VIEW
RDIS MODULE DTRX MODULE Tx1 CABLE CONNECTOR Tx2 CABLE MASTER CONNECTOR (N-type) SLAVE (N-type)
Rx CABLE CONNECTOR (N-type)
ALARMS CONNECTOR FOR BOOSTER
Figure 3-3 View of front and bottom of Horizoncompact2 chassis, showing cable connectors
Maint. 38
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
BTS enclosure removal procedure

The following procedure assumes that a hydraulic lift is to be used in the replacement of a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis. To remove the chassis: NOTE It is assumed that the Removing the solar cover, Removing the battery and Cable disconnection procedures have been carried out.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Refit the handles (previously stored for the purpose of re-use). Fit safety strap/lifting tackle to the cage and handle to ensure safety prior to removing bolts. Remove the short M8 bolt and washers that secure the bottom of the chassis to the wall bracket. Remove the two long M8 bolts and washers that secure the top of the chassis to the wall bracket. WARNING A Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 can weigh up to 28 kg. Handle with extreme care.
5.
Using the carrying/lifting handle and supporting the weight of the chassis, lift and pull the chassis away from the wall bracket.
BTS enclosure replacement procedure

To replace a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2, refer to the installation procedures detailed in Category 423, Chapter 2 of this manual. In summary, this involves:
S S S S S S
Unpacking the equipment. Installing the chassis. Connecting cables for earth, power, antenna, E1 links and alarms cable. Fitting the solar cover. Fitting battery/cover. Powering up the ac power supply.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 39
Replacing the BTS solar cover
GSM-209-523

Solar cover replacement procedure
WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the BTS. Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist within the BTS enclosure when the ac isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTS enclosure can cause eye damage. If fibre optic cables are fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
To replace the solar cover: 1. 2. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws, clamping the solar cover to the chassis, from the bottom of the solar cover. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards, until it is free from the top chassis locating lugs (see Figure 3-4). CAUTION 3. 4. 5. 6. The solar cover is susceptible to damage. Avoid dropping or placing anything on top of it.
Remove the solar cover and dispose of safely. Fit the new solar cover onto the top chassis locating lugs. Ensure the solar cover attaches onto bottom securing lugs. Tighten the two M5 tamperproof screws to the bottom of the solar cover, applying the correct torque.
Maint. 310
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Solar cover attachment diagram

Figure 3-4 shows the solar cover attachment to the chassis.
ig.056.rh
Figure 3-4 BTS solar cover attachment to chassis

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 311
Replacing the battery
GSM-209-523

Battery replacement procedure
WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the BTS.
To replace the battery bottom cover and integral battery: WARNING Support the battery while removing screws to avoid personnel being placed at risk when the battery detaches from the chassis.
1. 2. 3.
Release the two M5 tamperproof screws from the bottom of the battery. Carefully remove the battery bottom cover. Unpack the new battery pack from its protective wrapping and inspect for any damage. NOTE Ensure that the battery is fully charged before connecting to an operational system. Ensure a serviceable fuse is fitted to the battery. Using a clean, dry cloth, wipe the underside of the chassis to remove any excess moisture, and wipe any excess moisture from the gasket seal around the underside of the chassis.
4. 5.
Insert the blade fuse into the holder on the top of the new battery pack. Ensuring that the 2-pin connector is positioned at the left end of the chassis. Position the battery pack on the underside of the chassis (see Figure 3-5). Secure in place using the two M5 tamperproof screws and tighten to the correct torque.
6.
Maint. 312
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Battery attachment diagram

Figure 3-5 shows the battery attachment to the chassis.
BLADE FUSE
BATTERY/ COVER
CABLE EXIT CHANNEL
Figure 3-5 Battery attachment to chassis

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 313
Replacing customer interface clamp
GSM-209-523

BTS connectors location diagram
J3 (MMI)
ALARMS CONNECTOR FROM BOOSTER (USED ON HORIZONCOMPACT2 ONLY)
DINO (E1/HDSL)
J11 J13 J12
RHINO (E1/HDSL)
J14 J15 J16 J17 J13 J12
DINO LABEL
J11
PORT PIN TX 3 & 8 B RX 4 & 9 INTERNAL SLAVE
J13
INTERNAL MASTER
HDSL OPTION
J12
RHINO LABEL
ALARM
J14
TX A
J15
RX A
J16
TX B
J17
RX B
INTERNAL SLAVE
J13
INTERNAL MASTER
HDSL OPTION
J12
Figure 3-6 Location of customer interface connectors
Maint. 314
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Customer interface clamp diagram

Figure 3-7 shows the clamp used to protect the E1/HDSL connectors.
CUSTOMER INTERFACE CLAMP MAIN BRACKET (FIT TO CHASSIS CASING) CABLES TO CHASSIS CONNECTORS
SEALANT COVER STRAIN RELIEF CLAMP EXTERNAL CABLES IN UNDERSIDE VIEW
Figure 3-7 Customer interface clamp used to protect E1/HDSL connectors
Clamp removal procedure

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the BTS. Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist within the BTS enclosure when the ac isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected.
To remove the clamp to be replaced: WARNING Support the battery while removing screws to avoid personnel being placed at risk when the battery detaches from the chassis.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Remove the battery/battery cover (see Replacing the battery). Unscrew the sealant cover (four M5 screws). Remove the strain relief clamp (seven M3 screws). Remove the main bracket from the chassis casing (four M5 screws). Detach all connectors. Remove the entire customer interface clamp from the cable and dispose of safely.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 315
GSM-209-523
Clamp replacement procedure

To connect the E1/HDSL link(s) and alarms cable with clamp: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Unpack the new clamp. Unscrew the sealant cover (four M5 screws). Remove the strain relief clamp (seven M3 screws). Feed the cables through the strain relief clamp and main bracket. Attach the connectors as indicated by the following table: If ... Then ...
T43 connectors Insert the Type 43 coaxial connectors into the appropriate sockets (J14, J15, J16, J17) on the RHINO module. D-type connection HDSL connection Alarms cable connection Insert the 9 pin D-type connector into socket J11 on the DINO module. Insert the HDSL connector(s) into the appropriate socket (J12 and/or J13) on the RHINO or DINO (E1) module. Insert the alarms connector into the appropriate socket and screw in to secure.
The cable positions are as indicated in Figure 3-7. 6. Fit the main bracket to the chassis casing (four M5 screws) and tighten the screws to the correct torque. CAUTION 7. 8. 9. Ensure the cable connectors are firmly in place and that the cables are clamped without affecting the connectors.
Tighten the strain relief clamp (seven M3 screws) to secure the clamp onto the cables. Fit the sealant cover (four M5 screws) and tighten the screws to the correct torque. Refit the battery/battery cover (see Replacing the battery).
Maint. 316
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Replacing a booster
Replacing a booster
Introduction to replacing a booster
This procedure describes how to remove the Horizoncompact2 booster and replace with a new unit. CAUTION Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 for the conditions that must be considered before gaining access to internal equipment.
Tools
The tools specifically required for these procedures are:
S S S S S S S S
Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket. 6 mm hex bit. T25 tamperproof bit. T10 bit. Extension 1/4 inch to hex adapter. Screwdriver. Torque wrench. Hydraulic lift.
Booster removal procedures

Before the equipment is removed from the bracket the following procedures must be performed:
S S
Solar cover removal. Cable disconnection.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 317
Replacing a booster
GSM-209-523
Solar cover removal procedure

To remove the solar cover: 1. 2. 3. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to the chassis. From beneath the chassis, release the two M5 security screws that clamp the solar cover to the chassis. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs.
Figure 3-8 shows the removal of the solar cover from the chassis.
SOLAR COVER

ig.059.rh
Figure 3-8 Removing the booster solar cover (GSM900 version shown)
Maint. 318
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Replacing a booster
Booster disconnection procedure

With reference to Figure 3-9 (GSM900 version) or Figure 3-10 (DCS1800 version), to disconnect a Horizoncompact2 booster: WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolated so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked, and warning label attached. Ensure the RF output is prevented from entering the booster from the Horizoncompact2 BTS.
1. 2. 3.
Remove the screws and disconnect the security bracket. Remove the screws securing the ac power and alarms cable clamp. Disconnect the ac power socket from the power plug by releasing the captive screw and pulling, using the connector body. Release the power cable from the cable clips. Disconnect the alarms cable socket. Disconnect the N-type antenna plugs ANT1 and ANT2 from the sockets. Disconnect the N-type Tx1, Tx2 and Rx plugs from the sockets. Remove the nut and plain washers and disconnect the earth strap from the wall mounting bracket. Disconnect the main earth cable from the wall bracket. WARNING Stow disconnected cables so they do not create a hazard to personnel using the site.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 319
Replacing a booster
GSM-209-523
GSM900 booster cable locations diagram

Figure 3-9 shows the location of the cables to be removed.
SCREW POSITION (M8 x 16)
KEY HOLE SLOT KEY HOLE SLOT SECURITY BRACKET SCREWDRIVER
AC POWER SOCKET
ANT1 TX2 RX SCREW POSITIONS (M8 x 16) TX1 ALARMS CONNECTOR ANT2
Figure 3-9 View of front and bottom of chassis, showing cable connectors
Maint. 320
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Replacing a booster
DCS1800 booster cable locations diagram

Figure 3-10 shows the location of the cables to be removed.
SCREW POSITION (M8 x 16) KEY HOLE SLOT KEY HOLE SLOT SECURITY BRACKET
SCREWDRIVER
ALARMS CONNECTOR
RX
ANT1 SCREW POSITIONS (M8 x 16) TX2 AC POWER SOCKET ANT2
TX1
Figure 3-10 View of front and bottom of chassis, detailing cable connectors

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 321
Replacing a booster
GSM-209-523
Booster removal procedure

The following procedure assumes that a hydraulic lift is to be used in the replacement of a Horizoncompact2 booster. To remove the chassis: NOTE It is assumed that the Removing the solar cover and Removing the Cable disconnection procedures have been carried out.
1. 2. 3.
Remove the four M8 bolt and washers that secure the chassis to the wall bracket. Using the same four M8 bolts and washers, refit the handles (previously stored for the purpose of reuse). Fit the safety strap/lifting tackle to the cage and handle to ensure safety prior to removing the bolts. WARNING A booster can weigh up to 20 kg (GSM900) or 24 kg (DCS1800). Handle with extreme care.
4.
Using the carrying/lifting handle and, supporting the weight of the chassis, lift and pull away from the wall bracket.
Maint. 322
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Replacing a booster
Booster removal diagram

Figure 3-11 shows the booster removal details.
M8 BOLTS AND WASHERS
GSM900 VERSION
CARRYING/LIFTING HANDLES M8 BOLTS AND WASHERS
DCS1800 VERSION
CARRYING/LIFTING HANDLES
Figure 3-11 Removing the Horizoncompact2 booster NOTE The M8 bolts and washers removed from the mounting wall bracket are used to secure the handles to the Horizoncompact2 booster unit.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 323
Replacing a booster
GSM-209-523
Booster replacement
To replace a Horizoncompact2 booster, refer to the installation procedures detailed in Category 423, Chapter 2 of this manual. In summary, this involves:
S S S S S S
Unpacking the equipment. Installing the chassis. Connecting cables for earth, power, antenna, Rx and Txs. Fitting the security bracket. Fitting the solar cover. Powering up the ac power supply.
Maint. 324
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Replacing the booster solar cover
Replacing the booster solar cover

Solar cover replacement procedure
To fit the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover to the chassis: 1. Ensure that the two M5 tamperproof screws on the lower front cover brackets of the booster are released to fit the security bracket key hole slot, as shown in Figure 3-12 and Figure 2-2. Place the solar cover onto the Horizoncompact2 booster mounting bolts by tilting the lower cover and pushing into the keyhole position, then push forward to secure. Secure the cover by tightening the M5 security screws evenly to the specified torque.
2.
3.
Figure 3-12 shows the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover being mounted onto the chassis.
SOLAR COVER

ig.059.rh
Figure 3-12 Installing the solar cover (GSM900 version shown)

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 325
Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables
GSM-209-523

Introduction to replacement procedures
This section describes the following Horizonmicro2 procedures:
S S
Replacing the external antenna cable. Replacing an internal antenna.
External antenna cable removal procedure

To remove an external antenna cable: WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolated so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached.
1. 2.
Remove the Horizonmicro2 solar cover, as described in Replacing solar cover. Remove the N-type connector, unscrewing by hand.
External antenna cable replacement procedure

To connect a new antenna cable: 1. 2. Attach the N-type antenna connector, screwing by hand until firmly in place. Refit the Horizonmicro2 solar cover, as described in Replacing solar cover.
Maint. 326
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Internal antenna removal procedure

To remove the internal antenna from the Horizonmicro2 BTS: WARNING To minimise RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF, while connections are made to the Horizonmicro2. Potentially lethal voltages, up to 360 V dc and 240 V ac exist within the Horizonmicro2 enclosure when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected.
1.
Ensure power to the unit has been turned off, and batteries run down, or safe procedure for transceiver shut down achieved. Figure 3-13 shows an internal antenna fitted to the chassis (back chassis cover not shown for clarity). Remove the solar cover, as described in Replacing BTS solar cover. Remove the four M5 Torx screws. Detach the antenna from the chassis. Remove the N-type connector, unscrewing by hand. Dispose of the antenna safely.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Internal antenna replacement procedure

To refit a new antenna: 1. 2. 3. 4. Attach the N-type antenna connector, screwing by hand until firmly in place. Locate the antenna in the correct position. Fit four M5 Torx screws and tighten to the correct torque. Refit the solar cover, as described in Replacing BTS solar cover.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 327
GSM-209-523
Internal antenna location diagram

Figure 3-13 shows an Horizonmicro2 BTS internal antenna.
INTERNAL ANTENNA
Figure 3-13 Internal antenna attached to chassis on Horizonmicro2 BTS
Maint. 328
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Replacing Horizoncompact2 antenna cables

Introduction to replacement procedures
This section describes the following Horizonmicro2 procedures:
S S
Replacing the Rx, Tx1 and Tx2 cables. Replacing the booster ANT1 and ANT2 cables.
Removing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables

To remove the Rx, Tx1 and Tx2 cables: WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolated so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached. Ensure the RF output is prevented from entering the booster from the Horizoncompact2.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the Horizoncompact2 BTS solar cover (see Removing the solar cover earlier in this chapter). Remove the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover (see Removing the booster solar cover earlier in this chapter). Remove the Horizoncompact2 booster security bracket. Undo the RF N-type cables.
Replacing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables

To replace the Rx, Tx1 and Tx2 cables: 1. 2. 3. 4. Fit the new RF cables. Refit the Horizoncompact2 booster security bracket. Refit the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover. Refit the Horizoncompact2 BTS solar cover.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 329
GSM-209-523
Removing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables

To remove the booster ANT1 and ANT2 cables: WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolated so that there is no risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated and locked and a warning label attached. Ensure the RF output is prevented from entering the booster from the Horizoncompact2.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover (see Removing the solar cover earlier in this chapter). Remove the Horizoncompact2 booster security bracket. Undo the RF N-type cables. Remove ac power cable and alarm cable (this will also involve removing the cable clamp). Remove the ANT1 and ANT2 cables
Replacing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables

To replace the booster ANT1 and ANT2 cables: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Fit the new ANT1 and ANT2 cables Refit the RF cables. Refit the ac power cable and alarm cable (this will also involve refitting the cable clamp). Refit the Horizoncompact2 booster security bracket. Refit the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover.
Maint. 330
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Replacing the alarm cable

This procedure describes the removal and replacement of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 alarm cable.
Removing the alarm cable

To remove the alarm cable: 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the booster solar cover (see Removing the solar cover earlier in this chapter). Remove the booster security bracket. Remove the booster cable clamp. Remove the alarm cable.

To replace the alarm cable: 1. 2. 3. 4. Fit the new alarm cable. Refit the booster cable clamp. Refit the booster security bracket. Refit the booster solar cover.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 331
Replacing the expansion fibre optic cables
GSM-209-523

Introduction to fibre optic replacement
This procedure provides instructions for replacing the fibre optic cables which link up a master base transceiver station (BTS) to either one slave BTS (four carrier BTS site) or two slave BTSs (six carrier BTS site).

S S
Ratchet with 1/4 inch socket, to fit a tamperproof T25 tool bit. Torque wrench. WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the BTS. Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist within the BTS enclosure when the ac mains isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTS enclosure can cause eye damage. Ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
Maint. 332
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Fibre optic connections

Figure 3-14 shows the master and slave BTS interconnections.
MASTER BTS
PORT 2 PORT 1
PORT 1 SLAVE 1 BTS
PORT 1 SLAVE 2 BTS
Figure 3-14 Connecting master and slave BTSs

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 333
GSM-209-523
Fibre optic cable removal procedure

To remove the fibre optic cables (see also Figure 3-15): WARNING To minimize exposure to RF from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the BTS. Potentially lethal voltages, up to 240 V ac exist within the BTS enclosure when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTS enclosure can cause eye damage. Ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the BTSs solar covers as described earlier in Replacing the BTS enclosure. Remove the retaining pin(s) from the expansion cover(s) and push back to release. Retain the pin(s) for later use. On the master BTS, remove the four M5 screws securing the expansion casting and put them in a safe place. Release the master BTS expansion casting and unplug the fibre optic cable(s). CAUTION Do not allow the expansion casting to hang from the fibre optic cable.
5. 6.
On the slave BTS, remove the four M5 screws securing the expansion casting and put them in a safe place. Release the slave BTS expansion casting and unplug the fibre optic cable. CAUTION Do not allow the expansion casting to hang from the fibre optic cable.
Maint. 334
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Fibre optic cable replacement procedure

To replace the fibre optic cables (see also Figure 3-15):
Master BTS procedure

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the BTS. Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist within the BTS enclosure when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eye damage. Ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
1.
Locate the four optical fibre plugs on the expansion casting into the four sockets on the master BTS. The sockets have a plastic guide plate to ensure correct alignment. Secure the expansion casting to the BTS with four screws and tighten to 3.4 Nm torque. NOTE On early versions, remove the fibre protection caps before connection. The plastic guide fitted in the BTS(s) to ensure correct alignment of the fibre connectors may not be present take care to fit the connectors correctly.
2.
Connect the fibre optic link cable to the first slave BTS to port 1 on the master BTS (the connector is a bayonet type). Insert the plug into the socket and turn to lock into position. Connect the fibre optic link cable to the second slave BTS (if fitted) to port 2 on the master BTS. Place the expansion cover bottom locating lugs in the fixing positions and then push the unit forward to its fixing position. Secure the expansion cover to the BTS chassis with the retaining pin. Replace the solar cover as described in Replacing the BTS solar cover.
3. 4.
5.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 335
GSM-209-523
Slave BTS procedure

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the BTS. Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist within the BTS enclosure when the ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eye damage. Ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
1.
Locate the four optical fibre plugs on the expansion casting into the four sockets on the slave BTS(s). The sockets have a plastic guide plate to ensure correct alignment. Secure the expansion casting to the BTS with four screws and tighten to 3.4 Nm torque. CAUTION Do not allow the expansion casting to hang from the fibre optic cable.
2. 3.
Connect the fibre optic link cable to the master BTS to port 1 on the slave BTS. Place the expansion cover bottom locating lugs in the fixing positions and then push the unit forward to its fixing position. Secure the expansion cover to the BTS chassis with the retaining pin. Replace the solar covers as described in Replacing the BTS solar cover.
4.
Maint. 336
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Expansion cover and casting

Figure 3-15 shows fibre optic expansion casting and cover.
Rx2 Tx2 Rx1
PORT 2 PORT 1
Tx1
Figure 3-15 Fibre optic expansion casting and cover

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 337
Calibrating an MCU-m GCLK
GSM-209-523

Introduction to calibration
This section describes the procedure to calibrate the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 MCU-m GCLK. The Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 may require this procedure to be carried out once or twice in the life of the equipment. The GCLK has been factory set, and only needs calibration in the field when an OMC-R alarm indicates the requirement. Calibrate all test leads before using them in the procedures given in this chapter. This minimizes variations in test results. CAUTION A recognized laboratory must calibrate all test equipment annually. Do not calibrate test equipment or test leads in the field. Ensure that all test equipment associated with the commissioning of Motorola BTSs is within calibration date.
Test equipment required

Table 3-1 shows the required test equipment. Table 3-1 Required GCLK test equipment Quantity 1 Description Any TTY terminal. Comments The basic requirements are: S TFT screen. S S S Serial port. Battery power. Any terminal software can be used for TTY communications.
1 1 1 1
Rubidium standard. Frequency counter.
Minimum accuracy 1 x 1010. 1.25 ppb (parts per billion) or better reference. 10-digit display required.
Commercial terminal emulator PC PLUS or similar software. software. 9-way to 9-way D-type cable. MCU TTY cable. This cable can be assembled (see Figure 3-16 for pin connections). Alternatively, the cable can be purchased from an electronics store).
9-way to 9-way connector Motorola supply for GCLK and breakout board, including calibration. shorting links (jumper cables). Kit number SWLN7898.
Maint. 338
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
TTY cables and pin connections

This section describes the PC RS-232 connector and test TTY cables required for the calibration procedure.
PC RS-232 TTY connections

The RS-232 TTY connections on a PC is usually a male D9 connector with the pin connections as shown in Table 3-2. Table 3-2 D9 pin connections Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI Signal name (Data Carrier Detect) (Received Data) (Transmitted Data) (Data Terminal Ready) (Earth) (Data Set Ready) (Request To Send) (Clear To Send) (Ring Indicator)

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 339
GSM-209-523
Test TTY cable pin connections

The pin connections for the TTY cable mentioned in Table 3-1 are shown in Figure 3-16.
PIN NUMBER 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 TO PC COMMUNICATIONS PORT 9-WAY D-TYPE F 4 m LONG SCREENED CABLE TO BREAKOUT BOARD CONNECTOR 9-WAY D-TYPE M PIN NUMBER 3 2 5
Figure 3-16 9-way to 9-way cable test cable connections Usually, only a 3-wire interface connecting RXD, TXD and GND is required. However, some PC applications will require two extra shorting connections to be made at the PC connector only. These two connections are pin 4 to pin 6, and pin 7 to pin 8.
Maint. 340
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Crossed and uncrossed TTY cables

Instead of making up the TTY cable, crossed and uncrossed TTY cables can be purchased from an electronics store. In the uncrossed position, the TTY cable is made with the signals on pins 2 and 3 not crossed (pin 2 maps to pin 2, pin 3 maps to pin 3). In the crossed position, the TTY cable is made with the signals on pins 2 and 3 crossed (pin 2 maps to pin 3, pin 3 maps to pin 2). Figure 3-17 shows the connections for both crossed and uncrossed TTY cables.
1 2 3 4 5 FEMALE PLUGS INTO PC 1 2 3 4 5 CROSSED CABLE 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
UNCROSSED CABLE
Figure 3-17 Crossed and uncrossed TTY cables Figure 3-18 shows a breakout board with TTY connectors. Next to each connector on the breakout board is a 10 pin header. By moving two shorting links (jumper cables) from one end to the other, the connector can be changed from an uncrossed connection to a crossed connection.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 341
GSM-209-523
Safety precautions
Ensure that the following safety precautions are performed prior to calibration. WARNING Power to the transceivers must be turned OFF while connections are made to the BTS to minimize exposure to RF radiation. Potentially lethal voltages exist within the BTS enclosure when the ac isolator switch is ON and/or the battery is connected. Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTS enclosure can cause eye damage. If fibre optic cables are fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.
1. 2.
Ensure power to the unit has been turned off and the batteries run down, or the safe procedure for transceiver shut down has been achieved. Remove the battery/battery cover, observing normal handling safety precautions.
Procedure for MCU-m GCLK calibration

NOTE Next to each connector on the breakout board (Figure 3-18) is a 10-pin header. By moving two shorting links (jumper cables) from one end to other, the connector can be changed from an uncrossed connection to a crossed connection. An approved earth strap (high impedance) must be worn at all times when calibrating the MCU-m GCLK. The earth strap 4 mm jack plug must be connected to the ESP socket on the underside of the BTS.
CAUTION
Proceed as follows to calibrate the MCU-m GCLK: 1. Attach the 9-way test cable to the breakout board (see Figure 3-18) and to the 9-way connector labelled ALARM on the bottom of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 (see Figure 3-19). Attach the MCU TTY cable to the PC. Attach the other end of the MCU TTY cable to the connector on the breakout board marked SYNC. Press the RETURN (or ENTER) key on the keyboard for the prompt. The sync TTY prompt SYNC-MMI> should appear. Connect the frequency counter to the 8 kHz (REF 125 ms) BNC connector on the breakout board. Attach a 10 MHz reference signal from the rubidium standard to the 10 MHz BNC input connector on the frequency counter. Ensure the counter is set for external reference and triggers correctly on the 8 kHz input. Adjust the counter to display at least ten digits.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Maint. 342
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
6. 7.
Allow 15 minutes for the MCU-m to warm up, or the OCXO will not be stable. Type:
SYNC-MMI>dcal 8000Hz source Connected, Enter y when ready, a to abort test>y
The frequency measured will be approximately (but not exactly) 8000.00000 Hz. 8. Adjust the OCXO control voltage by typing: +3...+2...+1...+0...0...1...2...3 until the frequency is exactly 8000.00000 Hz.
Enter a to abort, s to save, +[0..3] to inc, [0..3] to dec>+2 Enter a to abort, s to save, +[0..3] to inc, [0..3] to dec>+1 Enter a to abort, s to save, +[0..3] to inc, [0..3] to dec>+1
NOTE
These numbers as entered relate to orders of magnitude. For example, typing +3 causes an increase ten times bigger than that caused by typing +2. The entries +0 and 0 are both valid.
9.
When the ref_125 ms frequency is exactly 8000.00000 Hz, specify save as follows:
Enter a to abort, s to save, +[0..3] to inc, [0..3] to dec>s
The calibration program sets the output frequencies to various different values and now requests that you type in the values of the output frequency at various points:
Dac set to 1.0 volts, Enter Freq value or a to abort>7999.99673 Dac set to 2.0 volts, Enter Freq value or a to abort>7999.99838
Dac set to 3.0 volts, Enter Freq value or a to abort>7999.99970 Dac set to 4.0 volts, Enter Freq value or a to abort>8000.00033
Dac set to 5.0 volts, Enter Freq value or a to abort>8000.00133 Dac set to 6.0 volts, Enter Freq value or a to abort>8000.00271 Dac set to 7.0 volts, Enter Freq value or a to abort>8000.00379 Calibration Gain 0.37345 SYNCMMI>
RETURN
This ends the calibration procedure.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 343
GSM-209-523
Diagram of breakout board

The breakout board is shown in Figure 3-18.
HORIZON 2 ALARMS BREAKOUT BOARD 8486145V01 ISS P20
DINO/RHINO (NIU) TTY CONNECTOR 9600 BAUD
8 kHz
SYNC PROCESSOR TTY CONNECTOR 9600 BAUD
REF 125 mS BNC CONNECTOR 10-PIN HEADER JUMPER CABLE LINKS IN UNCROSSED CABLE POSITION JUMPER CABLE LINKS IN CROSSED CABLE POSITION
9-WAY CONNECTOR
Figure 3-18 Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 breakout board

Maint. 344
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-523
Breakout board connection point

Figure 3-19 shows the connection point on the BTS for the breakout board.
ALARMS CONNECTOR BREAKOUT BOARD CONNECTS HERE LINE TERMINATION MODULE (RHINO SHOWN)
Figure 3-19 Underside of BTS showing breakout board connection point
Restoring the site

Proceed as follows to restore the site: 1. Shut down the transceivers or turn off the ac supply. WARNING 2. 3. 4. Transceivers must be turned off to prevent a RF hazard.
Disconnect the calibration equipment. Replace the battery/battery cover. Restore power to the BTS.

20th Sep 02
68P02902W64-O
Maint. 345
GSM-209-523
Maint. 346
20th Sep 02
CHAPTER 1 OPTIONS AND SPARES
Category 623
Parts Information (Parts)
Parts Information: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
GSM-209-623
ii
Parts Information: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W65-O
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
Category 623 Parts Information (Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Options and spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i i
11 11 11 12 13 14 15 15 16 17 19

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
iii
GSM-209-623
iv
20th Sep 02
Chapter 1
Options and spares

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
GSM-209-623
ii
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
Chapter 1 Options and spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 11 12 13 14 15 15 16 17 19

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
iii
GSM-209-623
iv
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
Options
Options
Introduction to options
Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 GSM900 and DCS1800 equipment is ordered by factory fitted configuration options and field fitted options.
Factory fitted BTS options

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 factory fitted configuration options comprise enclosure type and interface type. Figure 1-1 shows the range of factory fitted options.
HORIZONCOMPACT2 BTS ENCLOSURE OR HORIZONMICRO2 BTS ENCLOSURE
E1 DINO/RHINO BOARD
Figure 1-1 BTS factory fitted options

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
Parts 11
Options
GSM-209-623
Order and part numbers

NOTE Each order number includes the interface type and BTS type.
Horizonmicro2 interfaces
Table 1-1 lists the Horizonmicro2 configuration options. Table 1-1 Horizonmicro2 factory ordered configurations Version Configuration (including enclosure and solar cover (front)) E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL DCS1800 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL NOTE Order number with PCMCIA option SWUF6517 SWUF6518 SWUG6538 SWUG6539
GSM900
The HDSL is not fitted on equipment manufactured after 31st December 2001.
Horizoncompact2 interfaces
Table 1-2 lists the Horizoncompact2 configuration options. Table 1-2 Horizoncompact2 factory ordered configurations Version Configuration (including enclosure and solar cover (front)) E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL DCS1800 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL NOTE Order number with PCMCIA option SWUF6528 SWUF6529 SWUG6548 SWUG6549
GSM900
Parts 12
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
Options
Field fitted equipment options

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 field fitted configuration options comprise internal antenna (Horizonmicro2 only) and expansion kits. The pole mount banding tool is also included in this section. Figure 1-2 shows the available field fitted options and pole mount banding tool.
HORIZONMICRO2 OR HORIZONCOMPACT2 BTS
FIBRE OPTIC EXPANSION KIT
POLE MOUNT BANDING TOOL
INTERNAL ANTENNA (HORIZONMICRO2 ONLY)
Figure 1-2 Field fitted BTS options and pole mount tool

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
Parts 13
Options
GSM-209-623
Order and part numbers

Table 1-3 lists the order and part numbers. Table 1-3 Field fitted options and pole mount banding tool Item Horizonmicro2 GSM900 internal antenna Horizonmicro2 DCS1800 internal antenna Pole mount banding tool Order number SWAF3237 SWAG3238 SWLN4847 Part number 8504808N03 8504808N04 6604809N01
Expansion kits
Table 1-4 lists the order numbers for the fibre optic cable kit lengths. Table 1-4 Field fitted options fibre optic expansion kits Item Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 2 m Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 5 m Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 10 m Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 50 m Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 100 m Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 250 m Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 500 m Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 1000 m Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit as specified (except range 700 to 800 m) Order number SWLN6441 SWLN6560 SWLN6561 SWLN6562 SWLN6563 SWLN6564 SWLN6565 SWLN6567 SWLN6568 Part number N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Parts 14
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
BTS and booster spares

Introduction to spares
This section list the spares available for the Horizonmicro2 BTS and Horizoncompact2 BTS and booster. Figure 1-3 shows the range of Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 spares.
HORIZONMICRO2 BTS OR HORIZONCOMPACT2 BTS ENCLOSURE MOUNTING BRACKET
COMPLETED POLE MOUNTING OF WALL BRACKET
CUSTOMER INTERFACE KIT (CLAMP) BATTERY
POLE MOUNT BANDING TOOL
SOLAR COVER
ig.058.rh
Figure 1-3 BTS spares

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
Parts 15
GSM-209-623
BTS order and part numbers

NOTE Each order number includes the interface type and BTS type.
Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 common spares

Table 1-5 lists the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 order and part numbers. Table 1-5 Common spares Item Battery 22 V, 20 A (blade type) fuse Solar cover (front) Customer interface kit (cover plates, gel seal, foam gasket) (CLAMP) Installation kit (wall and pole mounting bracket and fixings) Pole mount banding tool GLCK calibration kit AC connector SWLN5775 SWLN5774 SWLN5240 SWLN4847 SWLN7898 SWLN8387A Order number Part number 6504929D01 1586937N01 0188330M01 0786402E01 6604809N01 0986065W01
Horizoncompact2 spares
Table 1-6 lists the spares equipment specific to Horizoncompact2. Table 1-6 Horizoncompact2 factory ordered configurations Version Configuration (including enclosure and solar cover (front)) E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL DCS1800 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL NOTE Order number with PCMCIA option SWLF6558 SWLF6559 SWLG6577 SWLG6578
GSM900
Parts 16
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
Booster order and part numbers

Figure 1-4 shows the Horizoncompact2 booster and solar cover.
ig.059.rh
Figure 1-4 Horizoncompact2 booster

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
Parts 17
GSM-209-623
Table 1-7 lists the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster spares. Table 1-7 GSM900 booster spares Item Horizoncompact2 booster GSM900 (no install/kit cover) Installation kit (wall and pole mounting bracket and fixings) Solar cover (front) Cable kit Alarm cable RF cable TX1 BTS to booster RF cable TX2 BTS to booster RF cable RX BTS to booster Antenna cable (2 off) AC connector SWLN8387A Table 1-8 lists the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster spares. Table 1-8 DCS1800 booster spares Item Horizoncompact2 booster DCS1800 (no install/kit cover) Installation kit (wall and pole mounting bracket and fixings) Solar cover (front) Cable kit Alarm cable RF cable TX1 BTS to booster RF cable TX2 BTS to booster RF cable RX BTS to booster Antenna cable (ANT 1) Antenna cable (ANT 2) AC connector SWLN8387A Order number SWLN6174 SWLN6172 SWLN6173 SWLN7002 3086777M01 3086326N01 3086326N02 3086326N03 3086327N01 3086327N02 0986065W01 Part number 0186331N01 0186324N01 0186319N01 Order number SWLN6614 SWLN6612 SWLN6173 SWLN6622 3086777M01 3086781M01 3086781M02 3086781M03 3086782M01 0986065W01 Part number 0186784M01 0186789M01 0186319N01
Parts 18
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
Labels
The labels attached to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment are important for safety reasons. Any missing or damaged labels must be replaced. The information provided here enables correct identification of the labels for replacement ordering purposes.
Horizonmicro2 BTS labels

Figure 1-5 shows the location of labels on the Horizonmicro2 BTS. Refer to Table 1-9 for a description of the labels and part numbers.
6 2 5
ig.081.rh
Figure 1-5 Horizonmicro2 BTS labelling

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
Parts 19
GSM-209-623
Table 1-9 explains the label numbering used in Figure 1-5. Table 1-9 Horizonmicro2 labelling No. 1 Description Warning Part No. 5486132V01 Comments Software codes. Dust covers for optical fibre cable sockets. Laser radiation risk. Identifies transceiver extension sockets. By access panel. Also ESD identifier. On lower part of Line Termination Module. On lower right corner of DTRX cover panel. Ratings and safety details. To the right of the Tx/Rx cable connector. On battery.
2 3 4
Information System identity Label on DINO or Label on RHINO GSM900 label DTRX or DCS1800 label DTRX Caution Battery specification
5486381N02 5486980E01 5486794M01 5486795M01 5486699V01 5486699V04 5402102W01 5486924E01
6 7
Parts 110
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
Horizoncompact2 BTS labels

Figure 1-6 shows the location of labels on the Horizoncompact2 BTS. Refer to Table 1-10 for a description of the labels and part numbers.
7 2 6
ig.081.rh
Figure 1-6 Horizoncompact2 BTS labelling

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
Parts 111
GSM-209-623
Table 1-10 explains the label numbering used in Figure 1-6. Table 1-10 Horizoncompact2 labelling No. 1 Description Warning Part No. 5486132V01 Comments Software codes. Dust covers for optical fibre cable sockets. Laser radiation risk. Identifies the fibre optic extension sockets. Beneath 3 N-type connectors on DTRX cover panel. By access panel. Also ESD identifier. On lower part of Line Termination Module. On lower right corner of DTRX cover panel. Ratings and safety details. To the right of the Rx cable connector. On battery.
2 3
Information GSM900: Tx1, Tx2 and Rx DCS1800: Tx1, Tx2 and Rx System identity Label on DINO or Label on RHINO GSM900 label DTRX or DCS1800 label DTRX Caution Battery specification
5486381N02 5486382N01 5486382N02 5486980E01 5486794M01 5486795M01 5486699V02 5486699V05 5402102W01 5486924E01
4 5
7 8
Parts 112
20th Sep 02
GSM-209-623
Horizoncompact2 booster labels

Figure 1-7 shows the location of labels on both Horizoncompact2 boosters. Refer to Table 1-11 for a description of the labels and part numbers.
4
GSM900 BOOSTER
3 1
CONNECTION IDENTITY LABEL
2 ANT2 TX2
ANT1
TX1
RX
DCS1800 BOOSTER
1 2 ANT2 TX1
CONNECTION IDENTITY LABEL
RX
TX2
ANT1
Figure 1-7 Horizoncompact2 booster labelling

20th Sep 02
68P02902W65-O
Parts 113
GSM-209-623
Table 1-11 explains the label numbering used in Figure 1-7. Table 1-11 Horizoncompact2 booster labelling No. 1 2 3 4 Description Rating and identity label Connection identity label Caution ionizing radiation label Hazardous materials label Rating and identity label Connection identity label Caution ionizing radiation label Hazardous materials label Part No. 5486699V01 5486783M01 5402102W01 n/a Comments Inside cover. Underside cover. Inside cover. Inside cover. GSM900 booster
DCS1800 booster 1 2 3 4 5486699V06 5486328N01 5402102W01 n/a Inside cover. Underside cover. Inside cover. Inside cover.
Parts 114
20th Sep 02
Index

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
I1
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
I2
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
A
AC isolator, Inst. 151 connecting cables, Inst. 158 AC supply power connector, Tech. 34, Inst. 154 power connector (booster), Inst. 161 schematic diagram (booster), Inst. 160 ACDC BPSM, Tech. 311 block diagram, Tech. 312 interfaces, Tech. 313 ACDC PSM block diagram, Tech. 36 interfaces, Tech. 37 Alarm cable, replacement procedure, Maint. 331 Alarms Horizoncompact2 booster, Tech. 520 power supply, Tech. 38 Antenna, cabling to booster, Inst. 226 Antenna cable replacement Horizoncompact2, Maint. 329 Horizonmicro2, Maint. 326 Antennas, Tech. 74
Booster antenna cable connections, Inst. 232 antenna cabling, Inst. 226 block diagram, Tech. 518 connecting ac supply cable, Inst. 235 connecting cables, Inst. 229 DCS1800, Tech. 25 functional description, Tech. 518 GSM900, Tech. 24 package contents, Inst. 116 power supply connections, Tech. 310 removal diagram, Maint. 323 replacement, Maint. 317 solar cover replacement, Maint. 325 supplementary earth connection, Inst. 231 system description, Tech. 517 Booster solar cover refitting, Maint. 26 removal, Maint. 24 BPSM, Tech. 519 Breakout board, Maint. 344 BTS, package contents, Inst. 113 Bypass mode, Tech. 519
C
Calibration, GCLK, MCUm, Maint. 338 Clamp, replacement, Maint. 314 Clamping tool, Inst. 143, Inst. 150 Combiner/isolator, Tech. 512 Commissioning, power up procedure, Inst. 45 Configurations, BTS, Tech. 73 Connectors location diagram (BTS), Maint. 314 location diagrams (booster), Maint. 320 Cooling, Tech. 61 airflow diagram, Tech. 64 booster, Tech. 65 heatsinks, Tech. 63 Customer interface clamp fitting, Inst. 221 maintenance, Maint. 315
B
Battery installation, Inst. 224 replacement, Maint. 312 specification, Tech. 16 Battery backup, Tech. 39 Battery check, Inst. 49 Battery test, Inst. 49
D
DCS1800, frequency band, Tech. 19
20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
I3
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
Decommissioning booster, Inst. 57 BTS, Inst. 52 Dimensions, Tech. 15, Inst. 14 DINO, Tech. 48 block diagram, Tech. 410 connector details, Inst. 219 connectors, Tech. 415 DINO/RHINO, Tech. 41 DTRX module, Tech. 53 Rx functional block diagram, Tech. 57 Rx/Tx interconnections, Tech. 513 Tx functional block diagram, Tech. 510 Dual band support, Tech. 72 Duplexer, Tech. 512
G
GCLK calibrating, MCUm, Maint. 338 calibration procedure, Maint. 342 GSM900, frequency band, Tech. 19
H
HDSL, Tech. 41 cabling guidelines, Inst. 171 functional description, Tech. 414 link options, Tech. 416 HDSL interface, Tech. 413 HDSL modems, Inst. 16 Heater, circuit block diagram, Tech. 62 Heater mats, Tech. 62 Horizoncompact2, external view, Tech. 14 Horizonmicro2, external view, Tech. 13
E
E1, link connection to BSC, Tech. 417 E1/HDSL link connections, Inst. 168 Earthing booster, Inst. 112 booster wall bracket, Inst. 162 BTS, Inst. 111 connecting site main earth, Inst. 159 connecting supplementary earth cable, Inst. 166 site, Inst. 110 wall bracket, Inst. 155 Expansion BTS configuration, Inst. 32 configuration diagrams, Inst. 33 dual band support, Tech. 72 system, Tech. 71
I
Installation battery, Inst. 224 booster cable connections, Inst. 218 booster packaging, Inst. 26 booster wall bracket, Inst. 144 BTS cable connections, Inst. 212 BTS onto wall bracket, Inst. 210 cable conduits, Inst. 156 Chassis, unpacking, Inst. 27 clearances, Inst. 17 HDSL cables, Inst. 172 layout examples, Inst. 122 mounting guidelines, Inst. 120 BTS packaging, Inst. 24 procedures, Inst. 11 site requirements, Inst. 14 tools required, Inst. 12 wall bracket, Inst. 137 Isolator, Horizoncompact2, Tech. 514
F
Fault diagnosis, Maint. 31 Fibre optic cables, replacement, Maint. 332 Fibre optics, expansion connections, Inst. 38 Field Replaceable Units (FRUs), Maint. 32 Frequency hopping, Tech. 12 Fuse, battery pack, Tech. 39
L
Labels, Parts 19 Lightning protection, Inst. 110 Line termination modules, Tech. 41
I4
20th Sep 02
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
M
Maintenance access conditions, Maint. 12 annual, Maint. 27 routine, Maint. 21 Maintenance cover, Inst. 19 MCUm, Tech. 42 block diagram, Tech. 43 Memory Management Unit (MMU), Tech. 42 MMI interface, Tech. 45 Modem, connection to BSC, Tech. 418 Module identification, Tech. 22, Tech. 23
R
Radio signalling links (RSLs), Tech. 413 RDIS, Tech. 41 Replacement, BTS enclosure, Maint. 33 Reset switches, DINO/RHINO, Tech. 412 RF, output power, Tech. 17 RF connectors, Inst. 167 RF modules, location diagram, Tech. 52 RHINO, Tech. 48 block diagram, Tech. 410 connector details, Inst. 219 connectors, Tech. 415 Rx, Tech. 416
O
Options, factory fitted, Parts 11 ORAC, Tech. 46 block diagram, Tech. 47
S
Safety, onsite, Inst. 18 Security bracket, installation, Inst. 237 Site ID, Tech. 45 Software, expansion requirement, Tech. 74, Inst. 16 Solar cover installation, Inst. 223 installation on booster, Inst. 241 refitting, Maint. 23 removal, Maint. 22 replacement, Maint. 310 Spares, BTS and booster, Parts 15 Specifications, Tech. 15 Sync block, Tech. 44
P
Part numbers booster, Parts 17 BTS, Parts 16 BTS options, Parts 12 PCMCIA interface, Tech. 44 Power consumption, Tech. 16 requirements, Tech. 16, Inst. 15 Power cables, requirements, Inst. 151 Power supply acdc PSM, Tech. 35 booster, Tech. 310 component diagram, Tech. 31 distribution board, Tech. 32 module diagram, Tech. 33 PSM, connector voltages, Tech. 32
T
Temperature detectors, DTRX, Tech. 511 Tools, for installation, Inst. 12 Torque settings, Inst. 13, Inst. 22, Maint. 14 Tx, Tech. 416
Q
QUICC32 processor, Tech. 43
U
Unpacking, BTS, Inst. 115

20th Sep 02
68P02902W61-O
I5
GMR-01
GSM-209-020
W
Wall bracket, installation, Inst. 137 Weight, Tech. 15, Inst. 14 equipment and packaging, Inst. 11
I6
20th Sep 02
GMR-01

Horizon

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Horizon

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CATEGORY 323 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

CATEGORY 423 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION

CATEGORY 523 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

CATEGORY 623 PARTS INFORMATION

GSM-209-020 Manual Revision

Reason for revision

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61-O

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Service Manual GSM-209-020

Service Manual GSM-209-020

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Positin mark for TED spine

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Service Manual Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

E Motorola 1999 2002 All Rights Reserved Printed in the U.K.

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61-O

Chapter 2 Equipment enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.

Chapter 3 Power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4 Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tech. Tech. Tech. Tech.

516 516 517 518

Chapter 6 Heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7 Expansion feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 423 Installation & Configuration (Inst.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.

Chapter 2 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.

Chapter 3 BTS expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Decommissioning the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.

Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.

Category 523 Maintenance Information (Maint.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2 Routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 Fault diagnosis and repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint. Maint.

329 329 329 329 330 330

Category 623 Parts Information (Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Options and spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61-O

Issue status of this manual

Issue status of this manual

Resolution of Service Requests

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61-O

About this manual

The objectives of this manual are:

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Special key sequences

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61-O

First aid in case of electric shock

First aid in case of electric shock

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Reporting safety issues

Reporting safety issues

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61-O

Warnings and cautions

Warnings and cautions

Example and format

Example and format